Contents

Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 308
1 of 308

Summary of Content for Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

OWNERS MANUAL

Arona

6F 90 12 72 0B A

In gl

s 6

F9 01

27 20

B A

( 07

.1 7)

A ro

na

In gl

s (

07 .1

7)

SEAT recommends SEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommends Castrol EDGE Professional

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.17

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer- tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ARONA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not in- cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modied depending on the technical requirements and on the mar- ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment tted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function- alities better. It does not replace the instruc- tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster- isk* is tted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow- ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- mation on safety. They warn you about possi- ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio- nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly nd the information you require.

Foreword This Instruction Manual and its correspond- ing supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa- tion concerning accessories, modifications and part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man- ual using:

Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure.

Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential information, which is detailed in the corre- sponding chapters.

Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa- tion concerning the passenger's front air- bag page 88, Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag.

Thank you for trusting in us.

We wish you safe and enjoya- ble motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

Related videos

The essentials: Opening and clos- ing

page 15 The essentials: Vehicle interior page 18 page 20 page 23

The essentials: Bonnet page 17 The essentials: Wheels page 60 page 61

The essentials: Air conditioning page 48 The essentials: Dash panel page 30 page 42 page 44

Convenience: Kessy keyless access and starting system, Full LED (+ Vision Pack): Full LED + Welcome light + LED day- time running lights + Lights sensor + LED interior lighting.

page 129 page 140 page 142 page 196

Technology: SEAT Navi System Plus 8 + Full Link / + Wireless charger in centre console + / Kessy keyless access and starting system.

page 123 page 129 Booklet Navigation system

Safety: Adaptive cruise control + City Safety Assist with pedestrian monitoring, fatigue detector, Hill driving assistant includes on-board computer and rear view camera.

page 182 page 209 page 227 page 242

Table of Contents

Table of Contents The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Driver-side general instrument panel (left- hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Driver-side general instrument panel (right- hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Passenger-side general instrument panel (left- hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 66

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 69

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 80 Belt pretensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 96 Towing or tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Changing the interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 113 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 118 System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys- tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 146 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 150 Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Manual air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5

Table of Contents

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Engine management and exhaust gas purifica- tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Area monitoring system (Front Assist) includ- ing City emergency braking and pedestrian monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- tance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 227 Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Rear Assist Rear View Camera* . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Accessories and modifications to the vehi- cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 267

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)* . . . . . . 283 Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

6

The essentials

Exterior view

page 16

page 54

page 15

page 54

1

2

3

4

page 66

page 17

page 60

5

6

7

7

The essentials

Exterior view

page 56

page 55

page 57

page 58

1

2

3

4

page 55

page 57

page 57

page 154

5

6

7

8

page 29

page 61

page 60

9

10

11

8

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

page 31

page 42

page 30

page 20

1

2

3

4

page 18

page 17

page 44

page 32

5

6

7

8

page 35

page 30

page 20

page 58

9

10

11

12

9

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

page 32

page 35

page 30

page 20

1

2

3

4

page 18

page 30

page 44

page 31

5

6

7

8

page 42

page 20

page 58

9

10

11

10

The essentials

Centre console

page 31

page 47

1

2

page 171

page 15

3

4

page 33

page 48

5

6

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

11

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

page 20

page 18

page 150

1

2

3

12

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

page 20

page 18

page 17

page 150

1

2

3

4 13

The essentials

Interior view

page 19

page 19

page 144

page 26

1

2

3

4

page 18

page 21

5

6

14

The essentials

How it works

Opening and closing

Related video

Fig. 1 Opening and clos- ing

Doors

Fig. 2 Remote control key: buttons.

Fig. 3 Centre console: Central lock buttons.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the key

Locking: press the Fig. 2 button.

Unlocking: press the Fig. 2 button.

Unlocking the rear lid: press the Fig. 2 button until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock- ing switch

Locking: press the Fig. 3 button. The symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it is activated. None of the doors can be opened from the outside. The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the inside door handle.

Unlocking: press the Fig. 3 button again. The symbol reverts to its initial colour.

in Description on page 126

page 126

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 4 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system page 132.

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 124.

15

The essentials

Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle Fig. 4 (arrow) then remove the cover up- wards.

Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special Characteristics

The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered page 132.

After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.

Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft page 132.

Emergency locking of doors without door cylinder

Fig. 5 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visible when the door is open) is provided on the front passenger door.

Pull the cap out of the opening.

Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.

Rear lid

Fig. 6 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres- sure on the handle Fig. 6.

This system may or may not be operative, de- pending on the situation of the vehicle.

If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked then the opening system is operative and the rear lid may be opened.

To lock/unlock, press the button or button Fig. 2 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

16

The essentials

Opening the rear lid: exert slight pressure on the handle Fig. 6. The rear lid opens au- tomatically.

Closing the rear lid: hold it by one of the handles on the interior lining and close it by pushing gently.

in Opening and closing on page 135

page 17

Unlocking the rear lid manually

Fig. 7 Unlocking the rear lid manually.

This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking does not work (for example, if the battery is flat).

There is a groove in the luggage compart- ment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.

Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage compartment

Insert the key in the groove and unlock the locking system, turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow Fig. 7.

Related video

Fig. 8 Bonnet

Bonnet

Fig. 9 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 10 Lever under the bonnet.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

Open the door and pull the lever under the dashboard Fig. 9 1 .

17

The essentials

To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on the lever located under the bonnet, in the centre Fig. 10 2 . The arrester hooks are released.

Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

in safety notes for work in the en- gine compartment on page 267

page 267

Electric windows*

Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows.

Opening the window: Press the button.

Closing the window: Pull the button.

Buttons on the driver door

Window on the front left door

Window on the front right door

Window on the rear left door (only vehi- cles with rear electric windows)

Window on the rear right door (only vehi- cles with rear electric windows)

Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons on the rear doors (only vehicles with rear electric windows)

in Opening and closing of the elec- tric windows* on page 135

page 135

Before driving

Related video

Fig. 12 Vehicle interior

1

2

3

4

5

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forward/back: pull the lever and move the seat forwards or backwards.

Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.

Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

in Adjusting the front seats on page 146

1

2

3

18

The essentials

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 14 Front seat: adjustment of the head re- straint.

To raise or lower the head restraint, press the side button 1 and move it upwards or downwards until it engages in the desired position.

in Adjusting the front head re- straints on page 146

page 75, page 146

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 15 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle.

Fig. 16 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should- ers, adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- vis.

page 78

page 80

19

The essentials

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the front seats are retracted automatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

in Service and disposal of belt ten- sioners on page 82

page 81

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 17 Detail of the driver door: control for the exterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired posi- tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver

L/R

side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired.

Folding in mirrors.

in Electric exterior mirrors* on page 145

page 145

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 18 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.

Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: Pull the Fig. 18 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired posi- tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.

in Adjusting the steering wheel po- sition on page 73

Airbags

Related video

Fig. 19 Vehicle interior

20

The essentials

Front airbags

Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 20 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- tively Fig. 20 Fig. 21.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger additional protection for the head

and chest in the event of a severe frontal col- lision.

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and pro- tected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

page 84

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag*

Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch.

To deactivate the front passenger front air- bag:

Open the door on the front passenger side.

21

The essentials

Insert the key blade into the slot provided in the deactivation switch.

Approximately of the length of the key blade remains inserted (the maximum).

Turn the key blade, changing its position to . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en- sure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go.

Finally, check the control lamp on the in- strument panel where it shows the following should appear .

in Deactivation of front passenger front airbag* on page 87

page 86

Side airbags*

Fig. 23 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 24 Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 23. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal function of protecting the occu- pants in a collision, the front and rear outer seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these air- bags provide maximum protection.

in Side airbags* on page 85

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 25 Location and deployment area of the head-protection airbag.

There is a head airbag on each side of the in- terior above the doors Fig. 25. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The area framed in red is covered by the head-protection airbag when it is deployed Fig. 25 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- jects should never be placed or mounted in this area in Curtain airbags* on page 86.

In the event of a side collision the curtain air- bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve- hicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

in Curtain airbags* on page 86

22

The essentials

Child seats

Related video

Fig. 26 Vehicle interior

Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag

Fig. 27 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the passenger-side sun blind and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 28 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the passenger-side sun blind and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the pas- senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame.

in Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag on page 88

page 88

23

The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 29 On the rear seats: Possible installa- tions for the child seat.

Figure Fig. 29 A shows the basic child re- straint system mounting using lower retain- ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- ure Fig. 29 B shows the child restraint system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer- sal type child seats to the vehicle seats marked with a U in the table below.

In the passenger seat without height ad- justment: It is necessary to place the passen- ger seat in its rearmost position1).

In the passenger seat with height adjust- ment: It is necessary to place the passenger seat in its rearmost and highest position1).

To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direc- tion of the car. In the case of front facing re- straint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a perfect position, adjust the passenger back- rest as far forward as possible1).

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- led, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ciently stable.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when us- ing or installing child seats.

24

The essentials

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X U* U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U* U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U* U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF* UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF* UF UF

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.

It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.

Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.

Acceptable for front-facing universal-cat- egory child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

X:

U:

UF:

Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest po- sition.

*: The systems include the child restraint sys- tem mounting with an upper retaining strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat.

in Safety instructions on page 89

25

The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/iSize and Top Tether system*

Fig. 30 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 31 Position of the Top Tether rings on the back of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. The ISO-

FIX rings are located between the rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Fig. 30. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear part of the backrests of the rear seats (be- hind the seat backrest or in the boot) Fig. 31.

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table below.

The body weight permitted and information regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la- bel on child seats with universal or semi- universal certification.

Weight group Size class Electrical equip-

ment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Baby carrier F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

26

The essentials

Weight group Size class Electrical equip-

ment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX uni- versal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.

It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child re- straint systems (CRS) that can be for the

IUF:

IL:

specific vehicle, restricted or semi-uni- versal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account.

ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

X:

in Safety instructions on page 89

27

The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/i-Size ISOFIX System

Fig. 32 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- turer's instructions.

Press the child seat onto the retaining rings located behind the grooves marked with the ISOFIX/iSize Fig. 32 logo until it is heard to engage securely. If the child seat is equip- ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the correspondent ring Fig. 34. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- sure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available from Techni- cal Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

Valid position for front-facing and rear- facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

Invalid position for child restraint sys- tems approved under ECE R129.

i-U

X:

28

The essentials

Securing child seats with the Top Tether* retaining straps

Fig. 33 Retainer strap: adjustment and as- sembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the back of the rear seat.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- cle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat backrest and provide greater re- straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted seats

Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap

Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer strap.

Place the belt under the head restraint of the back seat Fig. 33 (depending on the in- structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the head restraint if necessary).

Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 34.

Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap

Loosen the strap following the manufactur- er's instructions.

Push the lock and release it from the an- choring support.

in Safety instructions on page 89

29

The essentials

Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 35 Ignition key positions.

Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi- tion in order to remove the key. If necessary, press the locking key on the selector lever and release it again.

Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key into the ignition and turn it at the same time as the steering wheel in the direction indica- ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steering wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow plugs reheating

Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2

position.

Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1

position.

Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine

Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever in- to neutral.

Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the P position or into N.

Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not press the accelerator.

Start-Stop System*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal, the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. The ignition remains switched on.

in Ignition key positions on page 169

page 168

Lights and visibility

Related video

Fig. 36 Dash panel

Light switch

Fig. 37 Dash panel: light control.

Turn the switch to the required position Fig. 37.

30

The essentials

Symbol Ignition switch- ed off

Ignition is switch- ed on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Light off or daytime driving light on.

The Coming home and Leav- ing home guide lights may be switched on.

Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime running light.

Side light on. Daylight running lights switched on.

Dipped beam headlight off

Dipped beam switch- ed on.

Front fog lights: move the switch to the first position, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch completely from positions , or .

Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or turn it to the position.

page 138

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 38 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal: Right-hand parking light (ignition switched off).

Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light (ignition switched off).

Main beam switched on: Control lamp lit up on the instrument panel.

Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is pushed. Control lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

in Turn signal and main beam lever on page 139

page 139

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 39 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- ing lights.

Switched on, for example:

When approaching a traffic jam

In an emergency

The vehicle has broken down

When towing or being towed

in Hazard warning lights on page 142

page 141

31

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 40 Detail of headliner: front interior light- ing.

Knob Function

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Activating or deactivating the automatic door contact lights. The interior lights come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition. The light goes off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switched on.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on the vehicle version.

page 142

Windscreen wipers and window wiper blade

Fig. 41 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.

More the lever to the required position:

0 Windscreen wiper off.

More the lever to the required position:

1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control Fig. 41 A adjust the interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing the lever forwards, and simultaneously the wind- screen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is activa- ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wip- er starts simultaneously.

in Windscreen wiper and window wiper on page 143

page 143

page 69

32

The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings

Fig. 42 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 43 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

To select the settings menus, depending on the version, press the Easy Connect button and the SETTINGS function button, OR

press the button and then SETTINGS .

The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

Switch the ignition on.

If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.

Press the system's button, then the system's Vehicle function button Fig. 42 or the systems button to go to the Vehi- cle menu Fig. 43.

Press the SETTINGS function button to open the menu Vehicle settings menu Fig. 43.

To select a function in the menu, press the desired button.

When you press the menu button, the last se- lected menu will always be displayed.

When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is active.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing the BACK menus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) page 177

33

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Tyres Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) page 282

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value page 284

Driver assistance

Front Assist system (front monitoring system) Activation/deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning display page 203

ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation/deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. page 209

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation page 227

Parking and manoeu- vring ParkPilot Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound set-

tings, adjust volume page 236

Vehicle lights Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting page 142

Coming home/Leaving home func tion Start time for Coming home function, start time for Leaving home function page 140

Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing page 32

Opening and closing Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function page 136

Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation of switching off the alarm

page 126

Multifunction display

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consum- ers, ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speeding warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data from start, restore data total calculation

page 35

Date and time Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time format, set the date, date format

Measurement units Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption

Service Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service page 41

Factory settings All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mirrors, opening and closing, multi-function display

34

The essentials

in CAR menu on page 118

page 118

Driver information system

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operat- ed with the steering wheel buttons.

The number of menus displayed on the in- strument panel will vary according to the ve- hicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to pro- gramme or modify additional functions, ac- cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it will not be possible to read the menus page 39. Some warning messages can be confirmed and made to disappear with the

windscreen wiper lever button or the multi- function steering wheel button.

The information system also provides the fol- lowing information and displays (depending on the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data page 36 MFD from departure MFD from refuelling MFD total calculation

Assist systems page 38

Navigation Booklet Navigation system

Audio Booklet Radio or Booklet Naviga- tion system

Telephone Booklet Radio or Book- let Navigation system

Vehicle status page 33

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.

Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving.

Operating the instrument panel me- nus

Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- tons.

Fig. 45 Right side of multifunction steering wheel: control buttons.

The driver information system is controlled with the multifunction steering wheel buttons Fig. 45 or with the windscreen wiper lever Fig. 44 (if the vehicle is not equipped with multifunction steering wheel).

35

The essentials

Enabling the main menu

Switch the ignition on.

If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, press button Fig. 44 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 45.

If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- er: to display the main screen page 36 or to return to the main menu from another menu hold down the rocker button Fig. 44

2 .

If managed from the multifunction steering wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. To go from point to point in the main menu, press button or several times Fig. 45.

Select a submenu

Press the rocker switch Fig. 44 2 on the windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 45 until the desired option ap- pears marked on the menu.

The selected option will be displayed with a horizontal line underneath.

To consult the submenu option, press but- ton Fig. 44 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel Fig. 45.

Making changes according to the menu

Make the desired changes with the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel. To increase or decrease the values more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.

Mark or confirm the selection with button Fig. 44 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 45.

Selection menu

Menu Function

Driving data

Information and possible configura- tions of the multifunction display (MFD) page 36, page 118.

Assist systems

Information and possible configura- tions of the driver assistance systems page 38.

Navigation*

Information instructions from the acti- vated navigation system: when a route guidance is activated, the turning ar- rows and proximity bars are displayed. The appearance is similar to the Easy Connect system. If route guidance is not activated, the direction of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which you are driving are shown Booklet Naviga- tion system.

Menu Function

Audio

Station display on the radio. Track name on the CD. Track name in Media mode Book- let Radio or Booklet Navigation sys- tem.

Telephone Information and possible configura- tions of the mobile phone preinstalla- tion Booklet Radio or Book- let Navigation system.

Vehicle status

Display of the current warning or infor- mation texts and other system compo- nents, depending on the equipment page 118.

Journey data

The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- ent values for the journey and the consump- tion.

Changing between display modes on the MFD

In vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: Press the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever Fig. 44.

Vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel: turn the thumbwheel Fig. 45.

36

The essentials

Multifunction display memory

The multifunction display is equipped with three memories that work automatically: MFD from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD total calculation. On the screen display, you can read which memory is currently dis- played.

Toggle between memories with the ignition on and the memory displayed

Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button of the multifunc- tion steering wheel.

Menu Function

MFD from de- parture

Display and storage of the values for the journey and the consumption from when the ignition is switched on to when it is switched off. If the journey is continued in less than 2 hours after the ignition is switched off, the new data is added to the data already stored in the memory. The memory will automati- cally be deleted if the journey is in- terrupted for more than 2 hours.

MFD from re- fuelling

Display and storage of the values for the journey and the consumption. By refuelling, the memory will be erased automatically.

Menu Function

MFD total calculation

The memory records the values for a specific number of partial trips, up to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi- nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depend- ing on the model of instrument pan- el. On reaching either of these lim- itsa), the memory is automatically erased and starts to count from 0 again.

a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.

Erasing a memory manually

Select the memory that you wish to erase.

Hold the button of the multifunction steering wheel or the button of the multi- function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec- onds.

Personalising the displays

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust which of the possible displays of the MFD can be shown on the instrument panel display with the button and the SETTINGS function button page 118.

Data summary

Menu Function

Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption dis- play operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.

Average fuel consumption

After turning on the ignition, aver- age fuel consumption in li- tres/100 km will be displayed af- ter travelling about 300 metres. Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed. The value shown is up- dated approximately every 5 sec- onds.

Operating range

Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming the same style of driving is main- tained. This is calculated using the current fuel consumption.

Travelling time

This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.

Distance cov- ered

Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition.

Average speed

The average speed will be shown after a distance of about 100 me- tres has been travelled. Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed. The value shown is updated ap- proximately every 5 seconds.

37

The essentials

Menu Function

Digital dis- play of speed

Current speed displayed in digital format.

Speed warning at --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph

If the stored speed is exceeded (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - 155 mph), an audible warning is given together with a visual warn- ing.

Oil tempera- ture

Updated engine oil temperature digital display

Coolant tem- perature gauge

Digital display of the current tem- perature of the liquid coolant.

Storing a speed with the speed warning

Select the display Speed warning at --- km/h (--- mph) Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel to store the current speed and activate the warning.

To switch system on: adjust to the desired speed within 5 seconds using the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- tion steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds.

The speed is stored and the warning activa- ted.

To switch system off: press the but- ton or . The stored speed is de- leted.

Assist systems menu

Menu Function

ACC Display of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 209.

Front Assist Switching the monitoring system on and off page 203.

Fatigue detec- tion*

Switching the fatigue detection on or off (pause recommenda- tion) page 227.

Status display

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open

Fig. 46 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: front left door open; D: rear right door open (5-door vehicles only).

When the ignition is switched on or when driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are open will be indicated on the instrument pan- el display, and, as applicable, this will be in- dicated audibly. The display may vary accord- ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.

38

The essentials

Illustra- tion

Key to Fig. 46

A Do not continue driving! The bonnet is open or is not properly closed page 267.

B Do not continue driving! The rear lid is open or is not properly closed page 16.

C, D Do not continue driving! A vehicle door is open or is not properly closed page 126.

page 114

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain compo- nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults in the operation are displayed on the screen using red and yellow symbols and messages on the instrument panel display ( page 117, page 44) and, in some cases, with audible warnings. The dis- play may vary according to the type of instru- ment panel fitted.

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous in Warning symbols on page 117! Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa- ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct levels may cause damage to the vehicle! in Warn- ing symbols on page 118 Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces- sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.

page 117

Gear-change indicator

Fig. 47 Instrument panel: gear-change indica- tor (manual gearbox).

Gear-change recommendation

While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- tion for saving fuel page 190.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4C (+39F), the symbol (warning of risk of freezing) is displayed. At first, this symbol flashes and then it remains lit until the out- side temperature rises above +6C (+43F) in Indications on the display on page 115.

When the vehicle is at a standstill or when travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- ture displayed may be higher than the true

39

The essentials

outside temperature as a result of the heat produced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from -40C to +50C (-40F to +122F).

Engine oil temperature display

The engine reaches its operating temperature when in normal driving conditions the oil temperature is between 80C (178F) and 120C (248F). If the engine is required to work hard and the outside temperature is high, the engine oil temperature can in- crease. This does not present any problem as long as the warning lamps table on page 46 or table on page 46 do not appear on the display.

Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel

Press the rocker switch Fig. 44 2 until the main menu appears. Enter into Driving data. With the button 2 move to the oil temperature gauge.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel

Enter the submenu Driving data and turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- ture display appears.

Additional electrical appliances

Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: Press the rocker switch Fig. 44 2 until the main menu appears. Enter into the section Driving data. With the rocker switch, move to the display Convenience con- sumers.

Operation with the multi-function steering wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the right thumbwheel until the Convenience consumers display appears.

In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- rent sum of all the additional appliances.

Saving tips

Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in conditions that increase fuel consumption. Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- cations appear automatically only with the ef- ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will disappear automatically.

If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately after it appears, press any button on the windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- ing wheel*.

Note

If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af- ter you switch the ignition on again.

The saving tips do not appear in all situa- tions, but rather with a large separation of time.

Speed warning device

The speed warning device warns the driver when they have exceeded the pre-set speed limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning signal sounds, and the warning lamp and the driver message Speed limit excee- ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the instrument panel. The warning lamp switches off when reducing speed below the stored maximum limit.

Speed warning programming is recommen- ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi- mum speed, such as when travelling in a country with different speed limits or for a maximum speed for winter tyres.

Setting speed limit warning

You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.

Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP

> control button Driver Assistant > Speed warning.

40

The essentials

Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but- ton Systems or else Vehicle systems > Driver assistant > Speed warning.

The warning limit can be set from 30 to 240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.

Note

Please bear in mind that, even with the speed warning function, it is still important to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the speedometer and to observe the legal speed limits.

The speed limit warning function in the ver- sion for some countries warns you at a speed of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set speed limit.

Service intervals

Fig. 48 Instrument panel

The service interval indication appears on the instrument panel display Fig. 48 1 .

SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. In- spection).

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are already pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- vals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the technology used by SEAT, with this service you only need to change the oil when the ve-

hicle so requires. To calculate this change (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are consid- ered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the cor- responding service. The kilometres (miles) remaining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, when the ignition is switched on a Service remind- er is displayed.

Vehicles without text messages: a span- ner will be displayed on the instrument panel plus an indication in km.

The kilometres indicated are the maximum number of kilometres that can be travelled until the next service. After a few seconds, the display mode changes. A clock symbol appears and the number of days until the next service is due.

Vehicles with text messages: Service in --- km or --- days will be shown on the instrument panel display.

41

The essentials

Service due

When the service date is due, an audible warning is given when the ignition is switch- ed on and the spanner displayed on the screen flashes for a few seconds .

Vehicles with text messages: Service now will be shown on the instrument panel dis- play.

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:

Press and hold the button 2 for more than 5 seconds to consult the service message.

When the service date has passed, a minus sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- ometres or days.

Vehicles with text messages: the following message is displayed: Service --- km (miles) or --- days ago.

The time can also be set via the button and the SETTINGS function button in the Easy Connect system page 33.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as fol- lows:

Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ton 2 .

Switch ignition back on.

Release the 2 button and press it again for the next 20 seconds.

Note

The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper

lever, or OK on the multifunction steering wheel.

In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- culate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be cor- rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted in the Book- let Maintenance Programme.

If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea- son we recommend that the service interval display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.

Cruise control

Related video

Fig. 49 Dash panel

42

The essentials

Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*

Fig. 50 On the left of the steering column: controller and buttons to operate the cruise control system.

Fig. 51 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the cruise control sys- tem.

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 50 or the third lever Fig. 51

Effect

Switching on the cruise control sys- tem

Move controller 1 to the position on the turn signal lever or move the third lever forward.

The system switches on. The last set speed of the cruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise control sys- tem

Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the third lever. The current speed is stored and the cruise control is activated.

Temporarily switching off the cruise control

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the position or move the third lever into pressure point .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored.

Switching on the cruise control sys- tem again

Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into pressure point .

The set speed control is activated.

43

The essentials

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 50 or the third lever Fig. 51

Effect

Increasing the set speed of the cruise control

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 1 on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.Press on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the cruise control

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or move the third lever into position to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.Press on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the cruise control sys- tem

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lever into po- sition .

The system switches off. The set speed will be stored.

in Operation on page 199

page 198

Warning lamps

Related video

Fig. 52 Dash panel

44

The essentials

On the instrument panel

Fig. 53 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Red warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additional information on the instrument pan- el display

Parking brake on. page 175

Do not continue driving! The brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the brake system.

page 174 page 175

Lit up or flashing: Do not continue driving! Fault in the steering.

page 167

Driver or passenger has not fas- tened seat belt.

page 77

Use the foot brake!

Yellow warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additional information on the instrument pan- el display

Front brake pads worn.

page 177

it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- connection caused by the system.

flashes: ESC or ASR activated.

it lights up: fault in the ASR or dis- connection caused by the system.

flashes: ASR working.

ASR manually deactivated. Or else: ESC in Sport mode. page

177 ABS faulty or does not work.

Rear fog light switched on. page 30

lights up or flashes: fault in the emission control system.

page 194

it lights up: pre-heating of diesel engine. page

195flashes: fault in the diesel engine management.

fault in the petrol engine manage- ment.

page 194

lights up or flashes: fault in the steering system.

page 167

Tyre pressure too low, or fault in the tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem.

page 282

45

The essentials

Fuel tank almost empty. page 117

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.

page 82

Other warning lamps

Left or right turn signal.

page 31

Hazard warning lights on. page 141

Trailer turn signals page 245

it lights up green: Press the brake pedal! It blinks in green: the selector lever locking button has not engaged.

page 183

it lights up green: cruise control ac- tivated or speed limiter switched on and active.

page 42 page 200

it blinks in green: the speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- ded.

Main beam on or flasher on. page 31

On the instrument panel display

Fig. 54 On the instrument panel display: door open.

Do not continue driving! With the corresponding indi- cation: door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed.

page 126 page 16 page 267

Ignition: Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high page 273

Flashing: Fault in the engine coolant system.

Do not continue driving! Engine oil pressure too low.

page 270

Fault in the battery. page 276

Driving light totally or partial- ly faulty.

page 102

Fault in the cornering light system.

page 137

particulate filter blocked. page 194

Flashing: Fault in the oil level detection. Control manually.

page 270 Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.

Fault in the gearbox. page 190

Immobiliser active. page 169

Service interval display page 41

Mobile telephone is connec- ted via Bluetooth to the origi- nal telephone device.

Book- let Radio or Book- let Naviga- tion system

Mobile telephone battery charge meter. Available only for devices pre-installed in factory.

Freezing warning. The out- side temperature is lower than +4C (+39F).

page 39

Start-Stop system activated.

page 196

Start-Stop system unavaila- ble.

46

The essentials

Low consumption driving sta- tus

On the instrument panel

Fig. 55 Warning lamp for disabling the front passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag is disabled ( ).

page 86

The front passenger front airbag is activated ( ).

page 86

in Warning symbols on page 117

page 117

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 56 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever Fig. 56.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.

Move the gearbox lever to the required po- sition.

Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it downwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 56 R .

Release the clutch.

in Driving with manual gearbox on page 183

page 183

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 57 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- sitions.

Parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards (+) to go up a gear or backwards () to go down a gear.

P

R

N

D/S

+/

47

The essentials

in Selector lever positions on page 184

page 183

page 48

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 58 Selector lever: manual release from position P.

Should the power supply be interrupted, there is a manual unlocking device located

under the console of the selector lever, on the right. Releasing the selector lever re- quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver blade.

Removing the cover from the selector lever

Apply the handbrake to ensure that the car does not move.

Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev- er handle.

Releasing the selector lever

Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- low unlocking tab sideways Fig. 58.

Press the interlock button on the selector lever and move the selector lever to posi- tion N.

After carrying out the manual release, at- tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox console again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- charged battery) and the vehicle has to be

pushed or towed, the selector lever must first be moved to position N, after operating the manual release mechanism.

WARNING

The selector lever may be moved out of posi- tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap- plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi- cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi- cle could otherwise start to move inadver- tently after shifting the selector lever out of position P - accident risk!

Air conditioning

Related video

Fig. 59 Air conditioning

48

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 60 In the centre console: Climatronic con- trols

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

1

Temperature The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature.

2

Fan The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

3

Air distribution The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.

Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind- screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3C (+38F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents. 49

The essentials

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Seat heating buttons

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to apply the driver-side settings to the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side in order to set a different temperature.

Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off Press the button or manually set the fan to .

in General notes on page 158

page 165

50

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 61 In the centre console: Manual air condi- tioning controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

1

Temperature Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

2

Fan Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off Level 4: maximum fan level.

3

Air distribution

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the

fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

: Air distribution to footwells.

: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes. 51

The essentials

Air recirculation

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Seat heating buttons

in General notes on page 158

page 163

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 62 In the centre console: heating system and fresh air controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

52

The essentials

1

Temperature Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool or dehumidify the air.

2

Fan Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off Level 4: maximum fan level.

3

Air distribution

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

: Air distribution to footwells.

: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

in General notes on page 158

page 161

53

The essentials

Fluid Level control

Filling capacities

Capacities

Fuel tank 40 litres. 7 litre re- serve.

Windscreen washer fluid con- tainer

3 litres

Fuel

Fig. 63 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The tank flap is released electronically by means of the central locking and is located at the rear of the vehicle, on the right. The tank holds approximately 40 litres.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the left side.

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 63.

Closing the fuel tank cap

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go.

Close the lid.

in Refuelling on page 265

page 265

54

The essentials

Oil

Fig. 64 Engine oil dipstick. Fig. 65 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick loca- ted in the engine compartment page 270.

The oil should leave a mark between zones A and C . It should never exceed zone A .

Zone A : Do not add oil.

Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level in that zone.

Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .

Topping up engine oil

Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.

Add oil slowly.

At the same time, check the level to ensure you do not add too much.

When the oil level reaches at least zone B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

55

The essentials

Engine oil specifications

Engine type Flexible service (LongLife) Set Service (dependent on time/distance travel-

led)

Petrol engines VW 508 00

VW 504 00a) VW 504 00

VW 502 00b)

Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)c) VW 507 00 VW 507 00

a) Use of engine oil compliant with the VW 504 00 specification instead of VW 508 00 may have a slight negative effect on the vehicles exhaust gas values. b) If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 228 (for petrol) and EN 590 (for diesel) standards. c) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

in Changing engine oil on page 273

page 270

Coolant

Fig. 66 Engine compartment: coolant expan- sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment page 270.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolant when the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C (-13F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- corrosion protection in Topping up cool- ant on page 275. The mixture of G13 with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significant- ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and should therefore be avoided in Topping up coolant on page 275.

in Topping up coolant on page 274

page 273

56

The essentials

Brake fluid

Fig. 67 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gine compartment page 270.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- cal Service.

in Changing the brake fluid on page 275

page 275

Windscreen washer

Fig. 68 In the engine compartment: wind- screen washer reservoir top.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment page 270.

To top up, mix water with a product recom- mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win- dows.

in Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir water on page 276

page 276

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart- ment page 270. It does not require

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

in Symbols and warnings on han- dling the battery on page 276

page 276

57

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 69 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse box cover.

Fig. 70 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel

Opening: remove the fuse box cover in the direction indicated Fig. 69.

Closing: click the cover back into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

Raise the bonnet.

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 70

Then lift the cover out.

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Colour Amp rating

Green 30

Orange 40

in Introduction on page 100

page 100

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 71 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation

Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- trical equipment.

Open the corresponding fuse box page 100.

58

The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 71.

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.

To replace a fuse

Remove the fuse.

Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size.

Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au- thorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Halogen headlights. Type

Side light/DRL (daytime running light)

W21W

Turn signal PY 21W

Halogen headlight with LED DRL

Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Turn signal PY 21W

Side light/DRL (daytime running light)

LEDa)

a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulb lighta) Left Right

Brake lights 2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light P21 WLL

Reverse light P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehicle. The po- sition of lights may vary according to the country.

Light with LEDsa) Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED

Reverse light P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehicle. The po- sition of lights may vary according to the country.

page 102

59

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc- ture

Related video

Fig. 72 Wheels

What to do first

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible.

Apply the handbrake.

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.

Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position P.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.

Have the vehicle tool kit* page 61 and the spare wheel page 283 ready.

Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.).

All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

WARNING

Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users.

If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ture kit

Fig. 73 Standard representation: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre

Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the Fig. 73 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface.

Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously Fig. 73 10 .

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 73 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically.

Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 73 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve.

With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant bottle.

Remove the bottle from the valve.

Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ing the tool Fig. 73 1 .

Inflating the tyre

Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 73 8 into the tyre valve.

Check that the air bleed screw is closed Fig. 73 6 .

Start the engine and leave it running.

Insert the connector Fig. 73 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket page 151.

Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 73 5 .

60

The essentials

Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes.

Disconnect the air compressor.

If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.

Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve.

Repeat the inflation process.

If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician.

Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

Check the pressure again after 10 minutes page 95.

in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on page 94

page 94

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 74 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 75 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Towline anchorage

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Crank handle for jack

1

2

3

4

Jack*

Hook for extracting the central wheel trims*

Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.

in Vehicle tools on page 93

page 93

Central trim for steel rims*

Fig. 76 Correct positioning of the central wheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel bolts.

5

6

7

61

The essentials

Removing

Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools Fig. 75 6 ) to one of the chambers of the central wheel trim.

Insert the box spanner through the hook, supporting it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim.

Fitting

Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the S of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve Fig. 76 1 .

Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

Note

There is also a valve mark on the back of the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Central trim for alloy rims*

Fig. 77 Removing the central wheel trim.

Fig. 78 Fitting the central wheel trim.

Removing

Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools Fig. 75 6 ) to the housing provided for this Fig. 77.

Pull on it to remove the trim Fig. 77.

Fitting

Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim, fit- ting the protrusion on the trim into the recess in the rim Fig. 78 (arrows).

Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 79 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 79.

Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

62

The essentials

Wheel bolts

Fig. 80 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.

Fig. 81 Changing a wheel: tyre valve 1 and the correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel bolts

Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go Fig. 80.

Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise in Removing and fitting the wheel on page 65.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be pushed fully on again after changing the tyre.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt

Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool kit.

Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theft wheel bolt Fig. 81.

Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go over the adapter.

Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise in Removing and fitting the wheel on page 65.

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a different cap. This cap only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.

Important information about wheel bolts

Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe- cially matched during construction. There- fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft locking bolt must be threaded onto positions

2 or 3 , taking the tyre valves position as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be possi- ble to mount the hubcap.

63

The essentials

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 82 Jack position points.

Fig. 83 Fitting the jack.

Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slip- pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ping .

Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed Fig. 82.

Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 Fig. 83 is below the housing provi- ded.

Align the jack* so that tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the strut and the mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- spect to the support point 1 .

Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING

Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant risk of injury.

Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.

Only mount the jack* on the support points designed for this purpose on the strut, and always align the jack correctly. If you do not, the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad- equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!

The height of the parked vehicle can change as a result of variations in tempera- ture and loading.

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be raised on the cross- bar. Only place the jack* on the points de- signed for this purpose on the strut. Other- wise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and fitting the wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel

Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface.

Take off the wheel .

Putting on the spare wheel

When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation direction, observe the instructions in page 65.

Mount the wheel.

Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner.

Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs using the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect

64

The essentials

the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ting the wheel.

Wheel bolt tightening torque

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the tightening torque checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re- placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not properly tightened, they could come loose while driving and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control.

Use only wheel bolts which correspond to the rim in question.

Never use different wheel bolts.

Wheel bolts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be possi- ble to screw them easily.

To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- que, they could come loose while driving.

Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims.

If wheel bolts are tightened below the pre- scribed torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts or threads can be dam- aged.

CAUTION

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this reason, please take care and get a second person to assist you.

Tyres with compulsory rotation direc- tion

A directional tread pattern can be identified by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel to guarantee optimum properties of this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises, wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive

with care as this means the tyre does not of- fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- ticular importance when the road surface is wet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace the punctured tyre as soon as possible and restore the obligatory direction of rotation of all tyres.

Subsequent work

Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap.

Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion.

If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the luggage compartment page 152.

Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible.

In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- cator, adjust the pressure and store it in memory page 282.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean- while, drive carefully.

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

65

The essentials

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels.

Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- turer's fitting instructions.

Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

If there is a danger of being trapped de- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC page 177.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination.

195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5 mm

Remove wheel covers and any integral trim ring before fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free of snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the wheels become damaged quickly and may even be rendered unusable.

WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- tions. This will prevent the chains coming in- to contact with the wheel housing.

Emergency towing of the vehi- cle

Towing

Fig. 84 Right side of the front bumper: Tow- ing ring.

Fig. 85 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing ring.

Towline anchorages

Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- rages.

The towline anchorages are located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment, next to the vehicle tools page 61.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection Fig. 84 o Fig. 85 and tighten it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow- ed using a tow bar. You should only use a tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re- duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis- able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi- bre or similarly elastic material.

66

The essentials

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towline anchorages provided or a towing bracket.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

The tow rope must be taut before you drive off.

Release the clutch very carefully when start- ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler- ate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- experienced drivers should not attempt to tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- ways a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles with a manual gearbox. With an automatic gearbox, place the lever in N.

The brake servo only works when the engine is running. When not running, you must ap- ply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

in General information on page 96

page 96

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting it using the battery of another vehicle page 67. You should only attempt to tow- start a vehicle if charging the battery does not work. This is done by leveraging wheel movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the catalytic converter.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-star- ted:

Engage 2nd or 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing vehicle.

in General information on page 96

page 96

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged battery, the battery can be connec- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

67

The essentials

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 86 Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start-Stop system.

Fig. 87 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 86.

3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- hicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing the current B Fig. 86.

For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con- nect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself Fig. 87.

5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the bat- tery A .

6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Starting

7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on.

10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are discon- nected.

11.When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.

68

The essentials

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- nals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the start- er after about 10 seconds and try again after about a minute.

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 267, Working in the engine compartment.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the bat- teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explo- sion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Never attach the negative cable to fuel sys- tem components or the brake lines in the oth- er vehicle.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not lean on the batteries. This could re- sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- erwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Changing the wiper blades

Fig. 88 Wipers in service position.

Fig. 89 Changing the windscreen wiper blade.

To change the blades it is necessary to move the wipers from the rest position into the service position.

69

The essentials

Do not change the windscreen wipers when out of the service position, as it could cause paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades)

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

Turn the ignition on and off and then (with- in approximately 9 seconds) push the wind- screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The windscreen wipers will move to the service position Fig. 88.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the windscreen wiper arm.

Press the securing tab down 1 Fig. 89.

Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blade

Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it clicks into place.

Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in- itial position.

in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 96

page 96

Changing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 90 Removing and fitting the rear window wiper blade.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm away from the glass

Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove the blade Fig. 90 A.

Fitting the wiper blade

With one hand, hold the top end of the wip- er arm.

Place the blade as shown in Fig. 90 B and slide the adapter along until it engages.

in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 96

page 96

70

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- cially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured page 152.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir- rors properly according to your size.

Ensure that the passenger in the central rear seat always has the head restraint in the correct position for use.

Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- straints according to their height.

Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 88.

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 72.

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly page 77.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. When your concentra- tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road , for this reason:

Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.

Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

71

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

risk of injury. The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:

three-point seat belts,

Belt tension limiter for the front and rear side seats

Belt tensioners for the front seats,

front airbags,

Side airbags in the front seat backrests, with chest and head protection

ISOFIX anchor points for ISOFIX rear child seat system

height-adjustable front head restraints,

Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po- sition and non-use position

adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- sengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position for passengers

Correct sitting position for driver

Fig. 91 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel.

Fig. 92 Correct head restraint position for the driver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom-

mend the following adjustments for the driv- er:

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest Fig. 91.

Move the driver's seat forwards or back- wards so that you are able to press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled .

Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head Fig. 92.

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- tion so that your back rests completely against it.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 77.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat page 146.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

72

Safe driving

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel Fig. 91. If distance is less than 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special spe- cific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- ly.

Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Read the additional information carefully page 20

WARNING

Never adjust the position of the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this could cause an accident.

Move the lever up firmly so the steering wheel position does not accidentally change during driving. risk of accident!

Make sure you are capable of reaching and firmly holding the upper part of the steering wheel: risk of accident!

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

Correct sitting position for front pas- senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom- mend the following adjustments for the front passenger:

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible .

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- tion so that your back rests completely against it.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head page 75.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front passenger seat.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 77.

It is possible to deactivate the front passen- ger airbag in exceptional circumstances page 86.

Adjusting the front passenger seat page 18.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your chest and the dash panel. If distance is less than 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special spe- cific modifications are necessary.

73

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- gered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- senger in events such as sudden braking ma- noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal pro- tection when the backrest is in an upright po- sition and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- sition!

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear seat passengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must con- sider the following:

Sit up straight.

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- sition page 75.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 77.

Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children in the vehicle page 88.

WARNING

If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could sustain severe in- juries.

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Seat belts can only provide optimal protec- tion when seat backrests are in an upright position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po- sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- tioning of the seat belt increases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi- tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ly when the belt webs are properly posi- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- tially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- correct seat belt position. As the driver, you are responsible for all passengers, especially children.

Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travel- ling .

The following list contains examples of sit- ting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to make you aware of this issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle.

Never stand on the seats.

Never kneel on the seats.

Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

Never lean against the dash panel.

Never lie on the rear bench.

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

Never sit sideways.

Never lean out of a window.

Never put your feet out of a window.

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- well.

Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- gage compartment.

74

Safe driving

WARNING

Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- tion.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- er sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- sition during the trip page 72, Correct posi- tion for passengers.

Correct adjustment of front head re- straints

Fig. 93 Correctly adjusted head restraint as viewed from the front and the side.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- portant part of passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev- el as the top of your head, or at the very least, at eye level Fig. 93.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. An improper adjustment of the head restraints may cause death in an ac- cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- ries during abrupt braking actions or unex- pected manoeuvres.

The head restraints must always be adjus- ted according to the height of the passenger.

Correct adjustment of rear head re- straints

Fig. 94 Head restraints in the correct posi- tion.

Fig. 95 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- portant part of the passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci- dent situations

75

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Rear head restraints

The rear head restraints have 2 positions: use and non-use.

One position for use (head restraint raised) Fig. 94. In this position, the head re- straints are used normally, protecting pas- sengers along with the rear seat belts.

And one position for non-use (head re- straint lowered).

To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges with both hands in the direction of the arrow.

WARNING

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window Fig. 95.

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head re- straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 146.

Pedal area

Pedals

Ensure that you can always press the accel- erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unim- paired to their initial positions.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious injuries.

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- erings over the original floor mats. This

would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud- den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- celerator pedal. Risk of accident!

76

Seat belts

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt?

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your vehicle.

Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt lamp*

Fig. 96 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc- cupied and corresponding seat belt fastened display.

The control lamp illuminates to remind the driver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely.

Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off.

Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight.

When the ignition is switched on, the control lamp in the instrument panel lights up (de- pending on the model version) if the driver or passenger have not fastened their seat belts.

An audible warning signal will sound for a few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed

of more than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The warning light will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig- nition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 96 on the instrument panel in- forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The symbol indicates that the passenger in this seat has fastened his or her seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- dication can be hidden by pressing the 0.0/SET button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

77

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 97 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. These also help pre- vent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driv- ing around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air- bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!

Safety instructions on using seat belts

Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly.

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc- cupants must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of being in- jured.

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func- tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

78

Seat belts

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- curely.

Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- dent and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- essary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way.

The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 98 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Fig. 99 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing a seat belt.

It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on collision: when a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

called kinetic energy is created both in the passengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the greater the weight, the more energy there is to be absorbed in an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- netic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc- cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

79

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent con- tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 98.

It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- wise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- danger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 99.

How to properly adjust your seatbelt

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

Fig. 100 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle.

Fig. 101 Position of seat belt during pregnan- cy.

Read the additional information carefully page 19.

Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click Fig. 100.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

80

Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an automat- ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- dom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ing sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners page 81.

Releasing the seat belt

Press the red button on the belt buckle Fig. 100. The latch plate is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat belts

Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened prop- erly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- vere injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the torso

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen Fig. 101.

Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 88.

Read and observe the warnings page 78.

Belt pretensioners*

How the seat belt tensioner works

Read the additional information carefully page 20

The seat belts for the front and side rear oc- cupants are equipped with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, although only in severe head-on and lateral collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the oc- cupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle overturns, or in accidents where no major forces act on the vehicle.

Note

If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Specialised work- shops are familiar with these regulations, which are also available to you.

Service and disposal of belt tension- ers

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- ers or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt

81

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be ob- served.

WARNING

Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- cumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- matic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a specialised workshop only.

The belt tensioners will only provide pro- tection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work ef- fectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 77, Why wear a seat belt?.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying

airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- pant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis- tance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- mum protection.

The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- fied reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- to account that the visible damage in a vehi- cle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries.

All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain criti- cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 years old should always

82

Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrain- ed or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further in- creased if you are struck by an inflating air- bag.

To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the seat belt properly.

Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

Read the additional information carefully page 20.

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- al protection for the driver and passenger in combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system mainly comprises (as per vehicle equipment):

an electronic control and monitoring sys- tem (control unit)

frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

side airbags,

curtain airbags,

a control lamp on the dash panel page 84.

key-operated switch for front passenger air- bag,

a control lamp for disabling/enabling the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 84,

turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,

turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

the ignition is switched off

there is a minor frontal collision

there is a minor side collision

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 72, Correct position for passengers.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system might not trigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide addi- tional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- tion of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air- bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener- alised. Some factors play an important role,

83

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions

Driver airbag.

Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions

Front side airbag on the side of the acci- dent.

Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- dent.

Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position);

the hazard warning lights switch on;

all doors are unlocked;

the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag control lamp and seat belt ten- sioner

The control lamp monitors all airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including control units and wiring connections.

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner sys- tem

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored electroni- cally. The control lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switch- ed on (self-diagnosis).

The system must be checked when the con- trol lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,

turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. Have the air- bag system inspected immediately by a spe- cialised workshop.

If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni- cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev- eral more seconds after verification and will turn off if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly per- form its protective function.

If a malfunction occurs, have the system checked immediately by a specialised work- shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor- rectly.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags

Read the additional information carefully page 21.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are

84

Airbag system

seated correctly page 72, Correct position for passengers.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.

It is also important not to attach any ob- jects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Read the additional information carefully page 22.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or al- low children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to at- tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be trig- gered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the use of con- ventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- tiveness.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a special- ised workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.

Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag compo- nents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a

specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and curtain (head) airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak- ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work car- ried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- ure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door pan- el.

Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, un- less the holes left by the loudspeakers have been closed properly.

Always check that the openings are closed or covered if additional loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted inside the door panels.

Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised specialised workshop.

85

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Curtain airbags*

Read the additional information carefully page 22.

WARNING

In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the pre- scribed sitting position must always be main- tained with seat belts fastened while travel- ling.

For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this ad- justment.

There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head- protection airbags so that the head-protec- tion airbag can deploy completely without re- striction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side win- dows

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang- ers.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.

Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the air- bag components for other repairs (such as re- moval of the roof lining) should only be per- formed by a specialised workshop. Other- wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys- tem operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and curtain airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a special- ised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Deactivation of front passenger front airbag*

Fig. 102 Switch for activating and deactivat- ing the front passenger airbag.

Fig. 103 Centre side of dash panel: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console.

86

Airbag system

Read the additional information carefully page 21

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat, the front passenger front air- bag must be de-activated.

When the front passenger airbag is deactiva- ted, this means that only the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. All the other air- bags in the vehicle remain activated.

The and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on Fig. 103. After a few seconds, only the applicable one stays lit. If the airbag is disa- bled, stays lit permanently. If the air- bag is enabled, lights up for approxi- mately 60 seconds and then goes off.

Activating the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Open the door on the front passenger side.

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 102. About 3/4 of the key should en- ter, as far as it will go.

Then turn the key gently to the position. Do not force it if you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key fully.

When the ignition is switched on, check whether the control lamp

on the dash panel does Fig. 103 not light up .

The warning lamp is illuminated for 60 seconds in the centre part of the dash panel.

WARNING

It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that the key-operated switch is set to the cor- rect position.

You should deactivate the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac- ing child seat in exceptional cases page 88, Safety for children.

Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

As soon as the child seat is no longer nee- ded on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger front airbag again.

Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all in case of an accident.

Never leave the key in the airbag disabling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the control lamp is not continuously lit up when the front passenger

airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected imme- diately by a specialised workshop.

Do not use a child seat on the front pas- senger seat! The front passenger front airbag could be triggered in the event of an accident, even if there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sus- tain serious or fatal injuries.

It is unpredictable whether the front pas- senger airbag will deploy in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.

87

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- sons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 79. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must always use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod- ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de- signed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

Child seats in the opposite direction of travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).

Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX DUO Plus).

Child seats in the direction of travel (group 2): seat belt and ISOFIX (RMER KIDFIX XP).

Child seats in the direction of travel (group 3): with seat belt (TAKATA MAXI PLUS).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats. Always read and note page 88.

We recommend you always carry the manu- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag

Read the additional information carefully page 23.

Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:

Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag page 82.

Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag in Front airbags on page 84.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena- bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bled with a key-operated switch page 86. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 90.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.

88

Transporting children safely

Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- ses, to transport a child in the front passen- ger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disabled page 86, Deacti- vation of front passenger front airbag*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment op- tion, move it to the rearmost and highest po- sition. If it is a fixed seat, it should be moved to the rearmost position possible.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- cle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.

All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- juries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.

If children assume an improper sitting posi- tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an

accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- dent; as this could cause serious injury or even death.

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

Never leave a child alone in the child seat or inside the vehicle because depending on the season, very high temperatures may be reached inside a parked vehicle, which could be fatal.

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- ted and the seat belt should be properly in place page 77.

Only one child may occupy a child seat page 89, Child seats.

When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- tivated page 132.

Child seats

Safety instructions

Read the additional information carefully page 23.

WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 88.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top Tether* system child seats.

Never secure other child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Top Tether* system, or retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju- ries to the child.

Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- rectly using the ISOFIX and Top Tether* se- curing rings.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash.

Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment.

Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

89

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially ap- proved and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ries:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 months)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 years old)

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 years old)

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE- R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category

Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

Universal: Child seats with universal appro- val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt.

Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of uni- versal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed.

Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a

list of vehicle models for which they can be installed.

i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- R 129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.

Attachment systems overview

ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ment system allowing quick and safe attach- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- tachment establishes a rigid connection be- tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX attachment systems are used mainly in Eu- rope page 26. If necessary, ISOFIX at- tachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

90

Transporting children safely

Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at- taching them with an automatic three-point seat belt page 24.

Additional attachment:

Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat back- rest on the boot side page 29. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol.

Support bracket: Some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support brack- et. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of im- pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats

SEAT recommends attaching child seats as follows:

Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite direction of travel: ISOFIX and support brack- et or iSize.

Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury.

Make sure the support bracket is correctly and safely installed.

91

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Safety

Event Data Recorder

Description and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR).

The EDRs function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ta are used to support the analysis of how different vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- ing data and data from the restraint systems, such as:

How different vehicle systems worked.

Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seatbelts.

How hard the acceleration or brake pedal was pressed.

Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicles dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforementioned situations, accelerating or decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- cludes data from systems such as:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Front Assist.

Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac- cident situations. No data are recorded in normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances are personal data such as name, age, or gen- der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal ref- erence in the context of an accident investi- gation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB (On-Board-Diagnose) inter- face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless the owner (or, in Leasing cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle sys- tem quality. Any data used for the purposes

of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

92

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

Emergency warning triangle*

The use of reflective warning triangles is obligatory in emergencies in some countries. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light bulbs.

The warning triangle is under the storage compartment which is located under the lug- gage compartment floor.

Note

The warning triangle is not part of the vehi- cle's standard equipment.

The warning triangle should meet legal re- quirements.

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*

The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- partment which is located under the luggage compartment floor.

The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug- gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

Note

The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's standard equip- ment.

The first aid kit must comply with legal re- quirements.

Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. After it has expired you should purchase a new one.

The fire extinguisher must comply with le- gal requirements.

Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the next date for checking.

Before acquiring accessories and emergen- cy equipment see the instructions in Acces- sories and spares page 255.

Vehicle tools

Read the additional information carefully page 61

Depending on the equipment, the tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts*

Towline anchorage

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Jack*

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover* / wheel bolt cap clip.

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional ex- tras.

WARNING

The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no ac- count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve- hicles or other loads. Risk of injury.

Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.

If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured by suitable means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Note

The jack does not generally require any main- tenance. If required, it should be greased us- ing universal type grease.

93

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully page 60

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases:

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F).

In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm.

If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre.

If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park it at a safe distance from surrounding traffic to fill the tyre.

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid.

All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area.

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- erwise, you should seek professional assis- tance.

The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo- rary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop.

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- bility set as soon as possible.

The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.

Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children.

Never use a jack, even if it has been ap- proved for your vehicle.

Always stop the engine, apply the hand- brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a

manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre.

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements.

Note

A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.

Take into account the separate instruction manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur- er.

94

Self-help

Contents of the tyre mobility system*

Fig. 104 Standard representation: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ment. It includes the following components Fig. 104:

Valve insert remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ON/OFF switch

Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).

1

2

3

4

5

6

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- toring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).

Tube for inflating tyres

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for the valve insert. The valve in- sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot.

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable material.

Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice.

If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-

7

8

9

10

11

heating! Before switching on the air compres- sor again, let it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube Fig. 104 8

again and check the pressure on the gauge 7 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again.

Carefully resume your journey, without ex- ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach the nearest specialised workshop and re- place the tyre.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious injury.

Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

Seek specialist assistance.

95

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades

Read the additional information carefully page 69.

Perfect wiper blade condition is essential for clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a specialised workshop and cor- rected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.

The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

CAUTION

Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move any windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.

To prevent damage to the bonnet and the windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only be lifted off the windscreen when in service position.

Note

The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed.

You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.

Towing or tow-starting

General information

Read the additional information carefully page 66.

Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is towed with the engine switched off and the ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so large, even after just a few minutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could lock up.

WARNING

If the vehicle has no electrical power, the brake lights, turn signals and all other lights will no longer function. Do not have the vehi- cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.

96

Self-help

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-start- ing, for example, the towed vehicle can easily be driven into the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant in the automatic transmission the car may only be towed with the driven wheels lifted clear of the road, or transported on a special car transporter or trailer.

CAUTION

Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at- tempt to start it. There is risk of damage to the catalytic converter.

Note

Please observe related legal requirements.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe any regulations to the contrary.

The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- wise the front tow line anchorage could be pulled off the vehicle.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- ted. The jump start should be used instead page 67.

For technical reasons, towing the following vehicles is not allowed:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering re- mains locked and the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec- tronic lock of the steering column be re- leased if they are activated.

If the battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units may not operate correct- ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox- es):

Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ing lights.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.

Note

The vehicle can only be tow-started if the electronic parking brake and, if appropriate, the electronic lock of the steering column are

deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup- ply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started to deactivate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.

97

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

Anchoring the front tow line

Fig. 105 Right side of the front bumper: re- move the lid.

Fig. 106 Right side of the front bumper: tow- line anchorage screwed in.

The front towline anchorage is only mounted if the vehicle has to be towed.

There is a cover with an opening into which the towline anchorage is screwed on the right part of the front bumper.

Take the towline anchorage from the on- board tool set.

Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side until it is unclipped Fig. 105.

Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 106.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool kit. The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 107 Right side of the rear bumper: cover- cap.

Fig. 108 Right side of the rear bumper: tow- line anchorage screwed in.

The rear towline anchorage should only be mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle.

On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov- er which covers a threaded hole.

Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi- cle tool set page 93.

Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side until it is unclipped Fig. 107.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection as far as it will go Fig. 108 and tighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor- age should always be kept in the vehicle.

98

Self-help

WARNING

If the towline anchorage is not screwed in as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw connection shearing off during towing (acci- dent risk).

If your car has a towing bracket, only use special towing ropes. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only use special tow bars to prevent damage to the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe- cially approved for use with towing brackets.

Towing vehicles with a manual gear- box

Towing is relatively straightforward.

Please observe the relevant instructions page 96.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the road; it can also be towed with either the front or rear wheels lifted off the road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (30 mph).

Towing a vehicle equipped with auto- matic gearbox

Certain restrictions must be observed when towing your vehicle.

Please observe the relevant instructions page 96.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the ground. When doing so, please note the following points:

Make sure the selector lever is in the N po- sition.

The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h (30 mph).

The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine is not running, the gearbox oil pump does not work and the gearbox is not adequately lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan- ces.

If the vehicle has to be towed with a break- down truck, it must only be suspended at the front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo- cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e. travelling backwards), the drive shafts also turn backwards. The planetary gears in the automatic gearbox then turn at such high speeds that the gearbox will be severely damaged in a short time.

Note

If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the normal way, or if it has to be towed further than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported on a special car transporter or trailer.

Should the power supply to the selector lever be interrupted in position P, the selector lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be recovered/manoeuvred you must manually release the selector lever.

99

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death!

Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni- tion system.

Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- age (same colour and markings) and size.

Never repair a fuse.

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the key from the igni- tion.

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system.

Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.

Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle.

Note

One component may have more than one fuse.

Several components may run on a single fuse.

In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.

Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables.

Some of the equipment listed in the tables below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras.

Please note that the above lists, while cor- rect at the time of printing, are subject to change.

Fuses to the left of the instrument panel

Read the additional information carefully page 58

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow Hook 20

2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow Hook 20

11 CNG Solenoid Valves 7.5

100

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps

13 Lights switch, steering column LSS and SMLS, diagnostic port, rain/light sensor

7.5

14 steering column LSS: wiper controls 10

15 Instrument panel 7.5

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 30

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated Rear Window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

24 Connectivity Box, external audio source wiring (Double USB-Aux IN), telephone amplifier, MIB display

5

25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

31 9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

No. Consumer/Amps

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left Lights Power Supply 40

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10

40

Lights switch, diagnostic port, head- light range control, steering column LSS: Lights, halogen headlights, re- verse light switch

7.5

41 Electrochromic mirror, regulation of unfolded rear view mirrors, RKA with- out radio

7.5

42 Clutch pedal, ignition relays, CNG re- lay coil

7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper mo- tor

15

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5

46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5

48 Steering Column Lock, Kessy Control Unit

7.5

49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5

51 AA Pressure Sensor, heated jets 7.5

No. Consumer/Amps

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

58 Double Water Pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

60 Tow Hook 30

61 Tow Hook 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compart- ment

Read the additional information carefully page 58

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Engine Injection Module 30

2

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), Low temperature coolant pump (TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regulating Valve (TJ1), Coolant Valve AGR (TJ1), High and Low Water Bumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

4 Petrol engine pump relay (MPI), Gauge control unit (TSI and Diesel)

15

101

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps

5

Pressure transducer, EPW Solenoid Valve, TOG Sensor, PWM Electric fan, Camshaft Control Valve, Active Carbon Tank Valve and Oil Pressure Regulat- ing Valve (TSI)

15

6

Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 30

Glow plug relay, Suction hose resist- ance (Diesel)

7.5

7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15

8 Injectors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI and CNG), Fuel Metering Valve (Diesel)

10

9 Servo sensor 7.5

10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and BCM 7.5

14 Engine Injection Module, Main Engine Relay, ESC

15

15 Automatic Gearbox DQ200 and AQ160 30

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 Starter Motor 30

20 ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

24 TH4 Electric fan without A/C for mod- erate climate countries

30

No. Consumer/Amps

25

TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moderate climate countries

20

PTC1 40

26 TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric fan for warm climate countries

50

27

TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moderate climate countries

30

PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40

Changing bulbs

General notes

Read the additional information carefully page 59

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart- ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a dangerous area in safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 267.

Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail lights:

Halogen headlights.

Full-LED main headlights*

Halogen headlights with LED daytime run- ning lights*

Rear bulb light

LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam and route light) with light emitting di- odes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it re- placed.

WARNING

Take particular care when working on com- ponents in the engine compartment if the en- gine is warm, there is a risk of burns.

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head- light housing.

102

Fuses and bulbs

CAUTION

Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights be- fore you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment

Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis- pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note

Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporari- ly misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be mis- ted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.

Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead. The residue left by the fingerprints would vaporise as a result of the heat gener-

ated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface.

Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Change the front bulbs

Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 109 In the engine compartment: main beam headlight bulb.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the cover 1 anti-clockwise and take it out Fig. 109.

Remove the bulb connector 2 by pulling it outwards.

Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit the new one.

Fit the bulb connector 2 .

Fit cover 1 , turning it towards the right.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

103

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 110 In the engine compartment: remove the lid.

Fig. 111 In the engine compartment: dipped beam headlight.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop Fig. 110 1 in the direc- tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove the bulb connector Fig. 111 2 .

Unclip the retainer spring Fig. 111 3

pressing inwards to the right.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.

Fit the connector.

Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover during the operation.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Turn signal light and DRL (daytime running light)1)

Fig. 112 In the engine compartment: turn sig- nal light bulb 1 and DRL (daytime running light) bulb 2 .

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder Fig. 112 1 or 2 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light source cannot be replaced. It is designed to last the length of the vehicles service life. In case of failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

104

Fuses and bulbs

Fog light bulb

Fig. 113 Fog light: extracting the grille

Fig. 114 Fog light: remove the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

Lever the groove with a screwdriver Fig. 113 (arrow). Next, unclip the clips located on the edge of the grille, pulling on it.

Remove the 3 screws Fig. 114 1 and remove the fog light.

1.

2.

Remove the bulb connector 2 .

Turn the bulb holder 3 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on it and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Replace the bulb, making sure that the fixing guides are in the right position and then press it and turn it clockwise.

To install the headlight go back through the above steps in reverse.

Check that the bulb works properly.

Change the rear bulbs

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 115 Luggage compartment: access to the bolt securing the tail light unit.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7

8.

Fig. 116 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the lid, levering the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess Fig. 115 1 .

Remove the bulb connector 2 .

Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by hand or using a screwdriver.

Remove the light from the body, gently pulling it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth surface.

Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retaining tabs Fig. 116 A .

Change the damaged bulb.

To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

105

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

holder. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTION

Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paint- work or any of its components.

Note

Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches.

For LED lights, you can only change the turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 117 Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 118 Remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the rear lid cover in the direc- tion indicated Fig. 117.

Remove the bulb connector Fig. 118 1 .

Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retaining tabs A .

Change the damaged bulb.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse or- der for assembly and pay special atten- tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are properly secured.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

4.

6.

7.

8.

Note

For LED lights, you can only change the turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Number plate light

Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the special slot and remove the bulb.

Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until it is free.

Change the bulb.

Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until it fits fully.

Fit the light into the space and press until you hear a click.

106

Fuses and bulbs

Side turn signals

Fig. 119 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- grated in the rear view mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work- shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Given the difficulty involved in the replace- ment of this light it should be done by Tech- nical Services.

Changing the interior bulbs

Interior light and front reading lights

Fig. 120 Front reading light.

To remove the glass

Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas- ing and the glass Fig. 120.

Carefully remove the glass, levering it to avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs

Pull the bulbs outwards.

To remove the central bulb, hold and press to one side.

Assembly

Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen- tly on the outer edge of the side light.

First fit the glass with the fastening tabs over the frame of the switch. Next press the front part until the two long tabs click on the support.

Note

In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to re- place the light sources. If the light does not work, take the vehicle to an official Service.

107

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Emergencies

Luggage compartment light*

Fig. 121 Boot light.

Fig. 122 Boot light.

Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside edge -arrow- using the flat side of a screw- driver Fig. 121.

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing Fig. 122.

108

Operation

Fig. 123 Dash panel.

110

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

General instrument panel

Electric window controls* . . . . . . . . . 135

Door release lever

Control for adjusting electric exteri- or mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Air vents

Lever for:

Turn signals/main beam head- lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Depending on equipment fitted:

Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 198

Steering wheel with horn and

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

On-board computer controls . . . . 35

Controls for radio, telephone, navigation and speech dialogue system Booklet Radio

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 185

Instrument panel and warning lamps:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Warning and indication lamps . . . 45

Lever for:

Windscreen wipers and washer . . 143

Window washer-wiper system* . . 143

Multi-function display control* . . 35

Infotainment system:

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 150

CD player* and/or SD card* Booklet Radio

Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front passenger airbag disconnec- tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Switches for:

Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 161

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Front passenger seat heating con- trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Gear lever

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Depending on the equipment, but- tons for:

Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Start-Stop operation button . . . . . 196

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . 282

Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Starter button (Keyless Access lock- ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 171

Depending on the equipment:

USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg- er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Driver seat heating control* . . . . . . . 148

Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Steering column control lever* . . . . 20

Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . 142

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Note

Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tion is only fitted on certain models or are op- tional extras.

A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi- gation system.

The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models* may be slightly different from the layout shown in

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

111

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

page 111. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

112

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments

General instrument panel

Fig. 124 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

The layout of the instruments depends upon the model and the engine.

Rev counter (with the engine running, in hundreds of revolutions per minute) page 115.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the en- gine hot. However, it is advisable to

1

change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- ator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

Engine coolant temperature display page 116.

Displays on the screen page 114.

Adjuster button and display page 116.

2

3

4

Speedometer.

Fuel gauge page 117.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.

Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving.

5

6

113

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

CAUTION

When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on the instrument panel display Fig. 124 3 de- pending on the vehicle equipment:

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open page 38.

Information and warning texts.

Mileage.

Time.

Navigation instructions.

Outside temperature.

Compass.

Shift lever position page 183.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox) page 39.

Multifunction display (MFD) and menus with different setting options page 35.

Service interval display page 41.

Second speed display page 35.

Speed warning function page 40.

Start-Stop system status display page 196.

Identifying letters on engine (MKB).

Distance travelled

The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distance travelled since the last odometer reset. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

Briefly press the button Fig. 124 4 to re- set the trip recorder to 0.

Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be dis- played.

Time

To set the time, keep the button Fig. 124 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select

the hour or minute display.

To continue setting the time, press button 4 . Hold button down to scroll through the

numbers quickly.

Press the button 4 again in order to finish setting the time.

The time can also be set via the button and the SETTINGS function button in the Easy Connect system page 118.

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys- tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- played on the instrument panel.

Selector lever position

The selected gear is displayed on the side of the selector lever and on the instrument pan- el display. In positions D and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- played.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuel is displayed on the instrument panel while you are driving page 39.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speed can also be displayed in a different unit of measurement (in miles or in km per hour).

This option cannot be deactivated in models destined for countries in which the second speed must always be visible.

The second speed display can be adjusted in the Easy Connect system via the button and the SETTINGS function button page 118.

114

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Speed warning

When the speed setting is exceeded, this will be indicated on the instrument panel display. This is very useful, for example when using winter tyres that are not designed for driving at the maximum speed of the vehicle page 40.

The speed warning settings can be adjusted in the Easy Connect system via the button and the SETTINGS function button page 118.

Start-Stop operating display

Updated information relating to the status is displayed on the instrument panel page 196.

Identifying letters on engine (MKB)

Hold the button Fig. 124 4 down for more than 15 seconds to display the identifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do this, the ignition must be switched on and the engine switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Warning symbols on page 117.

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are above freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.

At outside temperatures above +4C (+39F), even when the ice crystal symbol is not visible, there may still be patches of ice on the road.

Do not rely on the outside temperature in- dicator!

Note

Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of displays without warning or informa- tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the warning lamps.

Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can also be carried out in the Easy Connect system.

When several warnings are active at the same time, the symbols are shown succes- sively for a few seconds and will stay on until the fault is rectified.

Rev counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en- gine revolutions per minute Fig. 124 1 .

Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm and af- ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- ing this range, you should change to a higher gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in D or take your foot off the accelerator ped- al.

We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. Consult the additional information in page 39, Gear-change indicator.

CAUTION

Never allow the rev counter needle 1

Fig. 124 to go into the red zone on the scale for more than a very brief period, other- wise there is a risk of engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and engine noise.

115

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Odometer

Fig. 125 Instrument panel: odometer and re- set button.

The distance covered is displayed in kilome- tres or miles m. It is possible to change the measurement units (kilometres km/miles m) in the radio/Easy Connect*. Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions Manual for more details.

Odometer/trip recorder

The odometer shows the total distance cov- ered by the vehicle.

The trip recorder shows the distance that has been travelled since it was last reset. It is used to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile.

The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- ing 0.0/SET Fig. 125.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder display. Have the fault repaired immediately, as far as is possible.

Coolant temperature gauge

For vehicles with no coolant temperature gauge, a control lamp appears for high coolant temperatures page 273. Please note .

The coolant temperature gauge 2

Fig. 124 only works when the ignition is switched on. In order to avoid engine dam- age, please read the following notes for the different temperature ranges.

Engine cold

If only the diodes in the lower part of the scale light up, this indicates that the engine has not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

Normal temperature

If in normal operations, the diodes light up until the central zone, it means that the en- gine has reached operating temperature. At high outside temperatures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may contin-

ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up on the instrument panel digital display.

Heat range

When the diodes light up in the upper area of the display and the control lamp appears on the instrument panel display, the coolant temperature is excessive page 273.

CAUTION

To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al- so depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature* page 40 as a guide.

Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating.

The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- duce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- tance.

116

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Fuel level

Fig. 126 Fuel gauge.

The display 6 Fig. 124 only works when the ignition is switched on. When the display reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode lights up in red and the control lamp ap- pears page 113. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flashes in red.

The distance to empty fuel level is displayed on the instrument panel 3 Fig. 124.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- hicle in the page 54 section.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir- regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex- haust system, which could cause the catalytic converter to overheat resulting in damage.

Warning and control lamps

Warning symbols

Read the additional information carefully page 44

There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).

Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)

If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will light up or flash and will be accom- panied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning message.

Examples of priority 1 warning messages (red)

Brake system symbol with the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUC- TION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT IN- STRUCTION MANUAL.

Coolant symbol with the warning mes- sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)

If one of these faults occurs, the correspond- ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa- nied by an audible warning. Check the corre- sponding function as soon as possible al- though the vehicle may be used without risk.

If several priority 2 warning messages are de- tected at the same time, the symbols are dis- played one after the other for about 2 sec- onds at a time. After a set time, the informa- tion text will disappear and the symbol will be shown as a reminder at the side of the display.

Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning messages have been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yel- low):*

Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.

117

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

Park the vehicle away from traffic and en- sure that there are no highly flammable ma- terials under the vehicle that could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel).

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- vise other drivers.

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe inju- ries page 267.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

System settings (CAR)*

CAR menu

Read the additional information carefully page 33

To select the settings menus, depending on the version, press the Easy Connect button and the SETTINGS function button, OR

press the button and then SETTINGS .

The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options in these me- nus will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those me- nus.

Function buttons in the vehicle settings menu

Page

ESC system page 177

Tyres page 282

Driver assistance table on page 33

Parking and manoeuvring page 236

Vehicle lights table on page 33

Mirrors and windscreen wipers table on page 33

Opening and closing table on page 33

Multifunction display table on page 33

Date and time table on page 33

Units table on page 33

Service page 114

Factory settings table on page 33

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from traffic.

118

Communications and multimedia

Communications and multi- media

Steering wheel controls*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio/navigation functions without needing to distract the driver.

There are two versions of the multifunction module:

Audio system + telephone without voice control version (MID): for controlling the au- dio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth sys- tem from the steering wheel.

Audio system + telephone with voice con- trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 119

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)

Fig. 127 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation*

A Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute

B Short press: access to the tele- phone menu in the instrument

panela).

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu in the instrument

panela).

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu in the instrument

panela).

Short press: answer incoming call / hang up call / access to

the call list. Hold down: reject incoming

call / rediala).

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu in the instrument

panela).

C Search for last station Short press: switch to the pre-

vious song Hold down: quick rewind

No function No function No function

D Search for the next station Short press: switch to the next

song Hold down: fast forward

No function No function No function

E , F Change menu on instrument

panela) Change menu on instrument

panela) Change menu on instrument

panela) Change menu on instrument

panela) Change menu on instrument

panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source

120

Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation*

H Turn: Next/previous presetb)

Press: Acts on the MFD Turn: Next/previous songb)

Press: Acts on the MFD Turn: No function

Press: Acts on the MFD

Turn: Access to call list / selec- tion of action on incoming call

or active call (answer/hang- up/ignore/hold/mute/switch

to private mode). Press: Confirm the selected ac-

tion by turning.

Turn: Changes menu or memo- ry on instrument panel

Press: Operates on instrument panel

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)

Fig. 128 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

A Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute

B

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-

ela). Hold down: rediala)

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-

ela). Hold down: rediala)

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-

ela). Hold down: rediala)

Short press: Answer incoming call / hang up call / access to

the call list. Hold down: Reject incoming

call / redial

Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-

ela). Hold down: rediala)

121

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

C Search for last station Short press: switch to the pre-

vious song Hold down: quick rewind

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex- cept AUX )

D Search for the next station Short press: switch to the next

song Hold down: fast forward

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex- cept AUX )

E , F Change menu on instrument

panel Change menu on instrument

panel Change menu on instrument

panel Change menu on instrument

panel Change menu on instrument

panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

H

Turn: Next/previous presetc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Next/previous songc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the dash pan- el menu depending on where

it is located Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Access to call list / selec- tion of action on incoming call

or active call (answer/hang- up/ignore/hold/mute/switch

to private mode). Press: Confirm the selected ac-

tion by turning

Turn: Acts upon the dash panel menu depending on where it is

located Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the

menu option

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

122

Communications and multimedia

Multimedia

USB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 129 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre con- sole Fig. 129.

The operating description is located in the re- spective Instruction Manuals of the audio system or the navigation system.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger*

Fig. 130 Related video

Fig. 131 Centre console: Connectivity Box.

Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one of these two op- tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger.

With the Connectivity Box you can charge your mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech- nology as well as reduce the radiation in the vehicle and have better reception.

With the Wireless Charger you only have the wireless charging function if your mobile de- vice has Qi technology.

The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger is in the storage compartment area of the centre console Fig. 131.

The operating description is located in the re- spective Instruction Manuals of the audio system or the navigation system.

Note

Your mobile device must support the Qi wire- less inductive charging interface standard for proper operation.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly.

123

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Opening and closing

Keys

Set of keys

Fig. 132 Set of keys.

The set of keys may consists of the following, depending on the version of your vehicle:

a remote control key Fig. 132 A

a key without remote control B ,

a plastic key tab* C .

or

two keys with remote control A .

a plastic key tab* C .

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni- cal Service with your vehicle identification number.

WARNING

An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri- ous injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci- dent. The doors can be locked using the re- mote control key. This could become an ob- stacle for assistance in an emergency situa- tion.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the ve- hicle.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- ing could suddenly block and it would be im- possible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

There are electronic components in the re- mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting the keys.

Remote control*

Fig. 133 Assignment of buttons on the re- mote control key.

Fig. 134 Vehicle key with alarm button.

The radio frequency remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a distance.

By using button 4 Fig. 133 on the control, the key shaft is released.

Unlocking the vehicle Fig. 133 1 . 124

Opening and closing

Locking the vehicle Fig. 133 2 .

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button Fig. 133 3 until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- ton 3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock again.

Moreover, the battery indicator on the key Fig. 133 (arrow), will flash.

The remote control transmitter and the bat- teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- pends on different factors. The range is re- duced as the batteries start to lose power.

Alarm button*

Only press alarm button in the event of an emergency Fig. 134 5 ! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn signals are switched on for a short time. When the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm is switched off.

WARNING

Read and observe the relevant warnings in Set of keys on page 124.

Note

The remote control key works only when you are in its scope.

If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked by using the radio frequency remote control, the remote control key will have to be re- synchronised. For this, go to your technical services.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 135 Vehicle key: opening the battery compartment.

Fig. 136 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 124.

Remove the cover from the back of the ve- hicle key Fig. 135 in the direction of the ar- row .

Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 136.

Place the new battery in the compartment as shown Fig. 136, pressing in the oppo- site direction to that shown by the arrow .

Fit the cover as shown Fig. 135, pressing it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged.

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

When fitting the battery, check that the po- larity is correct.

125

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

For the sake of the environment

Please dispose of your used batteries correct- ly and with respect for the environment.

Synchronising the remote control key

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door with the remote control, it should be re- synchronised.

While the vehicle is open:

Press the button 2 Fig. 133 on the re- mote control.

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft within one minute.

While the vehicle is closed:

Press the button 1 Fig. 133 on the re- mote control.

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft within one minute.

It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the remote con- trol if the button is repeatedly pressed out- side of the effective range of the radio fre- quency remote control. The remote control key will have to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system.

Up to five remote control keys can be used.

Central locking system

Description

Read the additional information carefully page 15.

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by just pushing the button.

Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:

the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it in the opening direc- tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei- ther all doors will be unlocked or only the driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be locked on locking the vehicle using the key.

the interior central lock button page 128.

the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key page 124.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Locking system Safe*

Selective* unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involunta- ry unlocking

Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press button Fig. 133 on remote control to unlock all the doors and rear lid.

Locking the vehicle*

Press button Fig. 133 on the remote control to lock all doors and the rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the rear lid.

WARNING

Locking from the outside carelessly or with- out good visibility may lead to bruising, par- ticularly in the case of children.

When locking a vehicle, never leave chil- dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out- side it will be difficult to provide assistance if required.

Having the doors locked prevents intruders from getting in, for example when stopped at a traffic light.

126

Opening and closing

Note

For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.

Safe security system*

This is an anti-theft device which consists of a double lock for the door locks and a deacti- vation function for the boot in order to pre- vent forced entry.

Activation

The safe system is activated when the vehi- cle is locked using the key or the remote con- trol.

To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in- serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con- trol, press the lock button once on the re- mote.

Once this system is activated, opening doors from the outside and the inside is not possi- ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen- tral lock button does not work.

When the ignition is switched off, the instru- ment panel display indicates that the Safe system is on.

Deactivation

Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder twice towards the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con- trol, press the lock button on the remote twice in less than five seconds.

On deactivating the Safe system, the alarm volumetric sensor is also deactivated.

With the Safe switched off, doors can be opened from the interior but not from the ex- terior.

See Selective unlocking system*

Safe status

On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi- ble from outside the vehicle through the win- dow which shows the Safe system status.

We will know that Safe system is activated by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted with an alarm, until they unlock.

Remember:

Safe activated with or without an alarm: warning lamp flashes continuously.

Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn- ing lamp stays off.

Safe deactivated with an alarm: the warning lamp stays off.

WARNING

No one should remain inside the vehicle if the Safe system is activated because opening the doors will not be possible in the event of an emergency neither from the inside nor the outside and help from the outside is made difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could become trapped inside in case of emergency.

Selective unlocking system*

This system allows to unlock either just the driver door or all the vehicle.

Driver door unlock button

Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote control.

Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder, rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver door will remain without Safe and un- locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see the Anti-theft Alarm section page 132.

Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The Safe sys- tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the driver door is unlocked and both the alarm and the warning lamp are also turned off.

127

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Unlocking all doors and the luggage com- partment

The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that all doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.

Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle, to unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi- cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Unlocking the luggage compartment

See page 16.

Self-locking system to prevent invol- untary unlocking

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- intentional unlocking of the vehicle.

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors (including the boot) are opened within 30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevents access to the vehicle from the outside when it is run- ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors will lock automatically if the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded.

If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors open, when starting again and exceeding the mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.

Unlocking

On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle will returns to its status prior to self-locking.

Each door can be unlocked and opened inde- pendently from the inside (for example, when a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper- ate the lever inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.

Note

If the airbags are triggered during an acci- dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the luggage compartment. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside with the central lock- ing, after turning the ignition off and back on again.

Central lock button*

Fig. 137 Central lock button.

Read the additional information carefully page 15

The central lock button allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside.

The central lock button also works with the ignition switched off, except when the safe system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your ve- hicle with the central lock button:

Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac- cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

The driver door cannot be locked while it is open. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.

128

Opening and closing

All doors can be unlocked separately from inside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door re- lease lever once.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, children and disa- bled people may be trapped inside it.

Repeated operation of central locking will prevent the central lock button from working for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un- locked in case it has been previously locked. After few seconds, the central locking be- comes operative again.

The central lock button is not operative when the vehicle is locked from the outside (with the remote control or the key).

Note

Vehicle locked, button.

Vehicle unlocked, button.

Related videos Keyless Access

Fig. 138 Convenience

Fig. 139 Technology

Unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless Access*

Fig. 140 Keyless Access locking and ignition system: In the proximity of the car.

Fig. 141 Keyless Access locking and ignition system: sensor surface A for unlocking in- side the door handle and sensor surface B

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, all that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in the detection area where you are attempt- ing to access the vehicle Fig. 140 and to touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door handles Fig. 141 .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via the driver door only. When doing so, the re- mote control key must be no further than ap- prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a briefcase.

129

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Once the doors have been locked, they can- not be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are prop- erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock only the drivers door, the side being un- locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessary adjustments can be performed in vehicles with a driver information system page 33.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of the car Fig. 140, the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the driver door handle is touched. The following features are then available without having to use the vehicle key actively:

Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using the handle of the front drivers door or the softtouch/handle on the rear lid.

Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the sensor on the driver door handle.

Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en- gine with the starter button page 171.

The central locking and locking systems oper- ate in the same way as a normal locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a double flash of the indicator lights; locking by a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key used inside the vehicle and none outside, the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- onds if you fail to open any door or the rear lid.

If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any door or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock again after a few seconds.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- Entry)

Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, the sensor surface Fig. 141 A (arrow) on the handle is touched and the vehicle unlocks.

Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info- tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors.

On vehicles without a Safe security sys- tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex- it)

Switch the ignition off.

Close the driver's door.

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B

(arrow) on the driver door handle. The door that is used must be closed.

On vehicles with a Safe security system: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)

Switch the ignition off.

Close the driver's door.

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B

(arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehicle locks with the Safe page 127 system. The door that is used must be closed.

Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow) of the driver door handle to lock the vehicle without activating the Safe security system page 127.

Unlocking and locking the rear lid

When a locked vehicle is opened, the rear lid automatically unlocks if there is a valid vehi- cle key in the proximity Fig. 140.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the rear lid locks automatically. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is

130

Opening and closing

blocked for engine ignition page 168. In order to enable engine ignition, the button on the key inside the vehicle needs to be pressed.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensors on the passenger doors are automatically disa- bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is often activated in an unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a certain period of time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

After a time.

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ton on the key.

OR: if the rear lid is open.

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection function

There is a sequence of actions to be followed if you wish to temporarily deactivate Keyless Access. First of all, lock the vehicle with the key. As of this moment, you have 5 seconds

to perform the second locking action through the door handle sensor.

If this second action is performed more than 5 seconds after the vehicle is locked with the key, it will not be possible to deactivate Key- less Access.

Once Keyless Access has been temporarily deactivated, the vehicle can only be unlocked using the key. The Keyless Access function will be reactivated once it has been unlocked.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows using the convenience function, keep a finger on the locking sensor surface Fig. 141 B (arrow) of the door handle for a few seconds until the windows have closed.

The doors opened by touching the sensor surface of the door handle depend on the settings that have been activated in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETTINGS and Opening and closing function but-

tons.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handles could engage if hit with a water jet or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor surface B

(arrow) on the handle is activated continu- ously, all windows will close.

Note

If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire- ly out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked or locked manually.

To control the proper locking of the vehicle, the release function is disabled for approx. 2 seconds.

If the message Keyless access system faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Con- tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Depending on the function set on the info- tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle us- ing the sensor surface on the driver door han- dle.

If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the dash panel screen. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal in- terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo- bile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay- er of salt, the correct functioning of the sen- sors on the door handles may be affected. In this case, clean the vehicle.

131

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear stick is in position P.

Childproof lock

Fig. 142 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This sys- tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ted and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to activate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- wise for the left-hand side doors Fig. 142 and clockwise for the right-hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- wise for the right-hand side doors, and clockwise for the left-hand side doors Fig. 142.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside. The childproof lock can be activated or deac- tivated by inserting the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm*

Description of anti-theft alarm sys- tem*

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the vehicle. The system is immediately activated and the turn signal light located on the driver door will flash along with the turn signals, indicating that the alarm and the locking security sys- tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- quently closed, they will be automatically in- cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle and the turn signals will flash accordingly when the doors close.

The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the alarm.

The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ing and activating the alarm.

132

Opening and closing

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm, if the following unauthorised actions are carried out when the vehicle is locked:

Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key without switching on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets, such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa- ted immediately).

A door is opened.

Opening the bonnet.

The rear lid is opened.

Ignition switched on with a non-validated key.

Movements in the driving compartment (vehicles with a volume sensor).

Towing of the vehicle1).

Vehicle tilt angle1).

Undue manipulation of the alarm.

Battery handling.

In this case, the acoustic signals will go off and the turn signal will flash for approximate- ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening all the doors in manual mode

In vehicles without an alarm, when opening the driver door manually, all doors are opened.

How to switch the alarm off

To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the key in the opening direction, open the door and switch the ignition on, or press the un- lock button on the remote control.

In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm system, you have 15 seconds to insert the key in the ignition lock and activate the igni- tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver door key.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. and the ignition will be blocked.

Note

After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from draining if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated.

The alarm will trigger again if attempts are made to open another protection zone.

The alarm system can be activated or deac- tivated using the radio frequency remote con- trol page 124.

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button .

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- rectly.

Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason.

The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active.

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- tow system*

Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau- thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- sound.

Activation

It is automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation

Open the vehicle with the key, either me- chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. If the vehicle is opened

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection 133

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

mechanically, the time period from when the door is opened until the key is inserted into the contact should not exceed 15 sec- onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- sors will be deactivated. The alarm system remains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are automatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system should be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, their movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is transported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm:

Open windows (partially or fully),

Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric sensor func- tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off.

If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- metric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated.

The vibration of a mobile phone left inside the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes inside the ve- hicle.

If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa- ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the

anti-tow system will only be activated once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).

Deactivating the vehicle interior moni- toring and anti-tow systems*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered if movements are detected in the interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in- clination is changed (e.g. during transport). You can prevent the alarm from being trig- gered accidentally by switching off the vehi- cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro- tection.

To switch off the interior monitoring and tow-away protection, switch off the ignition and, using the Infotainment system, select: button > SETTINGS function button >

Opening and closing > Central locking > Switch off alarm.

When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away pro- tection are switched off until the next time the door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)* page 127 is switched off, the vehicle interi- or monitoring and the tow-away protection are automatically switched off.

134

Opening and closing

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Descrip- tion on page 126.

Boot hatch

Opening and closing

Read the additional information carefully page 16

WARNING

Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of accident or injury.

The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights.

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- ing.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, de- pending on the time of year, thus causing se- rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid.

Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in- terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened if the key is left inside.

Electric windows

Opening and closing of the electric windows*

Fig. 143 Detail of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows (5-door vehicles with front and rear electric windows).

Read the additional information carefully page 18

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passen- ger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *

Safety switch 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated. The safety control symbol lights up in yellow if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Set of keys on page 124.

Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.

Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties.

135

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- dow.

If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of in- jury, for example, in the electric windows.

The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.

Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the ig- nition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened.

If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win- dow will automatically open again page 136. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempt- ing to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- jury when the electric windows close.

If a window is obstructed when closing au- tomatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately .

Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again.

If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- ing will stop working for 10 seconds.

If the window is still obstructed, the win- dow will stop at this point.

If there is no obvious reason why the win- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated.

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING

Always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehi- cle.

The electric windows will work until the ig- nition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened.

Closing the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury

to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.

The roll-back function does not prevent fin- gers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func- tion to easily open/close all the windows from the outside.

Convenience open function

Press and hold the button on the remote control key until all the windows have reached the desired position, or

First unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the windows have reached the required posi- tion.

Convenience close function

Press and hold the button on the remote control key until all the windows are closed , or

136

Lights and visibility

Lock the driver's door with the key and hold the key in the lock position un- til all the windows are closed

Programming convenience opening in the Easy Connect*

Select: button > SETTINGS function button > Opening and closing > Elec- tric windows > Convenience open- ing, to choose between all the windows (All), only the drivers window (Driver) or none (Deactivated).

WARNING

Never close the windows without due care or proper control. There is a risk of suffering injury.

For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close functions with- in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in- juries, always keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

One-touch opening and closing*

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to hold down the button.

Buttons Fig. 143 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have two positions for opening windows and two

for closing them. This makes it easier to open and close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening

Push down the window button briefly up to the second position. The window opens fully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been temporari- ly disconnected. The function can be re- stored as follows:

Close the window as far as it will go by lift- ing and holding the electric window switch.

Release the switch and then lift it again for 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic function.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage, the window will open (or close) until you release the button. If you push or lift the button briefly to the second stage, the win- dow will open (one-touch opening) or close (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op- erate the button while the window is opening or closing, it stops at this position.

Lights and visibility

Lights

Control lamps

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on page 139.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty.

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on page 139.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Warning symbols on page 117.

137

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Switching lights on and off

Read the additional information carefully page 30

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

Note

The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be ob- served.

The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.

If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- ble warning sounds while the driver door re- mains open. This is a reminder to switch the lights off.

The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor. For this reason, if you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38 mph), the instrument panel will display the follow- ing warming: Switch off the fog light! The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory require- ments.

Automatic lighting*

Activation

Rotate the switch to the position, this indication will light up.

Deactivation

Turn the light switch to .

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped beam headlights are automatically switched on by a photosensor if you drive in- to a tunnel, for example.

WARNING

Even if the automatic headlight control is switched on, the dipped beam headlights will not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the dipped beam must be switched on manually.

Note

For vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is removed from the ig- nition, the audible warning will only sound if the light knob is in position .

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory require- ments.

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may cause disrup- tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys- tem.

The rain sensor switches on the dipped beam headlights when the windscreen wipers have been operating continuously for a few seconds and it switches the lights off when the continuous or interval wipe is switched off for some minutes.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individ- ual lights, integrated in the front headlights. By connecting the daytime running lights, these lights are switched on1) .

The daytime running lights switch on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in positions or , according to the level of exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light sensor automatically switches dipped beam on and off (including the control and instrument lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting.

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear side light is switched on as well.

138

Lights and visibility

WARNING

Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- ditions. Daytime lights do not provide enough light to illuminate the road properly or be seen by other road users.

On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the dark- ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi- tions of poor visibility.

Fog lights

Fig. 144 Dash panel: light control.

Switching on the front fog lights*

Turn the switch from position or to the first stop and pull it. The symbol in the light switch lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with front fog lights)

Turn the lights control from position or to the second stop and pull it. A lamp on the control and warning lamps panel lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with no front fog lights)

Turn the lights control to the end from posi- tion , or and pull it. A lamp on the control and warning lamps panel lights up.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully page 31

Parking lights

Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.

Move the turn signal lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking lights on, respectively.

Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move the lever as far as possible upwards or down- wards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

The convenience turn signals are activated and deactivated in the Easy Connect system via the button and the SETTINGS function button page 118.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ing menu, this function can be deactivated in a specialised workshop.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam head- lights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.

Note

If the convenience turn signals are operat- ing (three flashes) and the other convenience turn signals are switched on, the active part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected.

The turn signals only work when the igni- tion is switched on. The corresponding warn- ing lamp flashes in the instrument pan- el. The control lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is cor- rectly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are defective, the control lamp does not light up. Change the bulb.

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights

139

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instrument panel.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instrument panel.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light on the corre- sponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only work with the ignition off. If said light is on, an audible warning will be emitted while the driver door is open.

If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This is intended as a remind- er to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on.

Coming Home/Leaving Home Func- tion*

Fig. 145 Related video

The Leaving Home function is controlled with a photosensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func- tion is connected, the front side and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition. When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the rear lid remain open.

If the light switch is turned to position .

If the ignition is switched on.

Automatic Leaving Home function

The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:

the light control is in position and

the photosensor detects darkness.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlights has ended

If the vehicle is locked again.

If the light switch is turned to position .

If the ignition is switched on.

Note

To activate the Coming/Leaving home func- tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi- tion and the light sensor must detect darkness.

Fog lights with cornering function*

This is an additional light source to dipped beam headlights to light up the road as a bend is taken.

The cornering light operates with the lights switched on and when driving at less than 40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning the steering or connecting the turn signal.

Forward gear

If the steering wheel is turned to the right, or the right-hand turn signal operated, the right-hand fog light turns on.

If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or the left-hand turn signal operated, the left- hand fog light turns on.

In reverse, both fog lights turn on.

Note

When the fog lamps are on, the cornering function is activated and both headlights are continuously on.

140

Lights and visibility

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehicles equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected via the corresponding Easy Connect system menu.

Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- er's visibility distance.

Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip- ped beam returns to its normal position.

Headlight range control

Fig. 146 Dash panel: headlight range control.

The lights range control adapts according to the value of the headlight beam and the ve-

hicle load status. This offers the driver opti- mum visibility and the headlights do not daz- zle oncoming drivers .

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch Fig. 146:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart- ment empty

1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty

2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment full. With trailer and minimum drawbar load.

3 Driver only, luggage compartment full With trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

Dynamic headlight range control

The control is not mounted in vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The head- light range is automatically adjusted accord- ing to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract other driv- ers. This could result in a serious accident.

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other drivers.

Hazard warning lights

Read the additional information carefully page 31

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehi- cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten- tion of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

141

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ig- nition is switched off.

WARNING

The risk of an accident increases if your ve- hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your sta- tionary vehicle.

Due to the high temperatures that the cata- lytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflammable materi- als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note

The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off.

The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- tory requirements.

Interior lights

Related video

Fig. 147 Convenience

Lighting of instruments and controls

The lighting level of instruments, controls and displays can be adjusted through the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETTINGS function button page 33.

The instrument lighting (some dials and nee- dles), the centre console lighting and the lighting of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorporated in the instrument panel.

The instrument lighting (needles) is switched on when the ignition is on and the light is off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto- matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when ambient light is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver to switch on the dipped beam

headlights in good time when light condi- tions become poor.

Interior and reading lights

Read the additional information carefully page 32

Luggage compartment lighting

The light is activated when the rear lid is open, even when the ignition and lights are turned off. For this reason, ensure that the rear lid is always closed.

Ambient light*

The ambient light lights up the area of the centre console and the footwell area and, de- pending on the version, the front door panels as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness when the doors are opened and the lights will be dimmed during driving, when the light selec- tor is in the , or position.

The brightness of the ambient light* can be adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as can colour, in versions with lighting on the front door panel (see Adjusting Lights > Interior lighting page 33).

142

Lights and visibility

Note

If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in- terior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from dis- charging.

Visibility

Heated rear window

Fig. 148 With the air conditioning controls: heated rear window switch.

The heated rear window only works when the engine is running. When it is switched on, a lamp lights up on the switch.

After approximately 8 minutes, the heating device of the rear window switches off auto- matically.

For the sake of the environment

The heated rear window should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav- ing electrical power you can also save fuel.

Note

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Sun visors

Fig. 149 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors:

Lower the sun visor towards the wind- screen.

The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 149 1 .

Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- gitudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror

There is a vanity mirror, with a cover 2 , on the rear of the sun blind.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.

Windscreen wiper and rear win- dow wiper systems

Windscreen wiper and window wiper

Read the additional information carefully page 32

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili- ty and safety levels while driving.

In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventila- tion system. The windscreen washer fluid

143

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

Always note the corresponding warnings page 69.

WARNING

The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers.

If necessary, switch on the wipers manually when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- bility.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the wind- screen wipers and the window wiper are not frozen. If you switch on the windscreen wip- ers when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both the wip- er blades and the wiper motor.

Note

The wipers and washers will work only when the ignition is switched on.

The heat output of the heated jets* is con- trolled automatically when the ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.

In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only work in inter- val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.

When the interval wipe function is on, the intervals are directly proportional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.

If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically change to a lower position speed. The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls away.

The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once the auto- matic wash/wipe system has been activa- ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func- tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3 seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without performing the last wipe. For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and then on again.

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen- sor disruption or faults.

Depending on the version of the model, when you engage reverse gear and with the headlight wiper activated, this can start a wipe.

Rear view mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the rear window.

Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function*

The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- led if reverse gear is engaged.

Note

The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects preventing light from reaching the in- terior rear vision mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz- zle function from working well or even from working at all.

Folding in the exterior mirrors man- ually

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol- ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to- wards the vehicle.

144

Lights and visibility

Note

Before washing the vehicle with an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid damage.

Electric exterior mirrors*

Fig. 150 Exterior mirror controls.

Read the additional information carefully page 20

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in the driver door.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob Fig. 150 to position L (left ex- terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri- or mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle.

3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior mirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex- terior mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle .

Heated exterior mirrors*

Press the demisting button Fig. 148

The mirrors demist for some minutes to prevent draining the battery unnecessarily.

If necessary, press the button again to re- peat the function.

The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above approximately +20C (+68F).

Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically*

Turn the control Fig. 150 to position to fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al- ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help prevent damage.

Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex- tended position*

Turn the knob to position L or R to return the exterior mirrors to their original posi- tion .

Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking (convenience function)*

The Easy Connect system, the button and the function buttons SETTINGS and Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to

have the exterior mirrors fold in when the ve- hicle is parked page 118.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote control, by pressing for more than approxi- mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol- ded in automatically. When the vehicle is opened with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING

Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es- timate distances to vehicles behind you.

Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment

The exterior mirror heating should be switch- ed off when it is no longer needed. Other- wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

145

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Note

If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op- erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. being knocked while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.

The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h (25 mph).

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seat and head re- straints

Adjusting the front seats

Read the additional information carefully page 18

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers page 71.

WARNING

Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad- justing your seat, you will assume an incor- rect sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec- tion of the seat belt can be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front passenger have prop- erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the

backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web!

Exercise caution when securing the seat height into forwards/backwards position. In- juries can be caused if the seat height is ad- justed without due care and attention.

To move the seat forwards and backwards, pull upwards and not sideways on the lever, as the force exerted on it in that direction could damage it.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Read the additional information carefully page 19

Adjust the head restraint page 19 so that as far as possible the top of the head re- straint is level with the top of your head. When this is not possible, try to get as close as possible to this position.

WARNING

Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.

After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for height to achieve optimal protection.

Please observe the safety warnings in Correct adjustment of front head restraints on page 75.

146

Seats and head restraints

Note

When fitting the head restraints again, in- sert the tubes as far as possible into the guides without pressing the button.

Adjusting the rear head restraints

Fig. 151 Rear centre head restraint: release point.

When transporting people in the back seat, place the head restraints of the occupied seats at a minimum of the next socket up .

Adjusting the head restraints

To set the head restraint higher, grasp the sides with both hands and move it up- wards, until you see it engage.

To set the head restraint lower down, press the 1 Fig. 151 button and move it downwards.

Removing the head restraint

To remove the head restraint, the correspond- ing backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 149.

Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- rives to the top.

Press button 1 , while simultaneously pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head restraint.

Move the backrest until it engages properly .

Fitting the head restraint

To mount the external head restraints, the corresponding backrest must be partially fol- ded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 149.

Insert the head restraint bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not be possible to remove the head restraint from the backrest.

Move the backrest until it engages properly .

WARNING

Please observe the general notes page 75.

Remove the rear head restraints only when it is necessary for the placement of a child seat page 88. After removing a child seat, remount the head restraint immediately. Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.

Seat functions

Introduction

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can cause severe injuries.

Assume the proper sitting position before your trip and remain in it throughout. This al- so applies to the other occupants.

Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other parts of the body away from the operating ra- dius and the adjustment of seats.

147

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Heated seats*

Fig. 152 In the centre console: front seats heating switch : version with Climatronic. : version with manual air conditioning.

The seat cushions can be heated electrically when the ignition is switched on. The back- rest is also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged in any of the following conditions:

The seat is unoccupied.

The seat has a covering.

There is a child seat installed in the seat.

The seat cushion is wet or damp.

The indoor or outdoor temperature is great- er than 25C (77F).

Activate

Press the button or . Seat heating is switched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output

Press the button or repeatedly until the desired intensity level is reached.

Deactivating

Press the button or until all warning lamps switch off.

WARNING

Children and people who cannot perceive pain or temperature because of medications, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating, an occurrence that may entail a very lengthy recovery period or from which it may not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical advice if you have doubts regarding your health.

People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating.

If an abnormality in the device's tempera- ture control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad- versely affect the operation of the seat heat- ing, increasing the risk of burns.

Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater.

Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp.

Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat.

Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest.

Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma- terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating.

In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

148

Seats and head restraints

Folding down the back seat

Fig. 153 Folding up the rear seat cushion.

Fig. 154 On the rear seat backrest: unlock button 1 ; red mark 2 .

Folding seat down

Remove the head restraint page 146.

Pull the front edge of the seat cushion Fig. 153 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

Lift the cushion 2 forwards in the direc- tion of the arrow.

Press the unlock button Fig. 154 1 for- wards and at the same time fold the back- rest down. The rear seat backrest is not en- gaged when the red marking of the button

2 is visible.

Insert the head restraints in the spaces on the rear of the seat cushion which are visi- ble when the seat cushion is lowered.

Folding seat forward

Remove the head restraints from the spaces in the seat cushion.

Lift the backrest, and before securing it, re- place the head restraints in the seat cush- ion, and then click the seat correctly onto the locking rails. The red marking on the tab 2 should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

Lower the cushion and push it backwards below the seat belt buckles.

Press the front part of the cushion down- wards.

On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush- ion can be lowered and raised respectively in two sections.

WARNING

Please be careful when folding back the backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and at- tention.

Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais- ing the backrest.

After raising the backrest, check it has en- gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling on the central seat belt or directly on the backrest and check that the position lever is in the neutral position.

The three point automatic seat belt only works correctly when the backrest of the cen- tral seat is correctly engaged.

149

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Transport and practical equipment

Practical equipment

Glove compartment

Fig. 155 Passenger side: glove compartment.

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever Fig. 155.

This compartment can hold documents in A4 format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD player is located in the glove compartment. Separate operating instructions are enclosed for this equipment in the corresponding In- struction Manual.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud- den braking or by an accident.

Storage compartment under the front seats*

Fig. 156 Storage compartment under the right front passenger seat.

To open

The compartment is opened by pulling on the lever and guiding it with your hand.

To close

Press the cover inwards until the closed drawer clicks into position.

Note

The storage drawer will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.

Storage pocket in the seat*

Fig. 157 Storage pocket.

There is a storage pocket on the rear of the front seats.

Storage compartment in front door panel*

In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot- tle, etc. can be stored.

150

Transport and practical equipment

Front drink holder*

Fig. 158 Front drink holders in the centre con- sole.

In the central console, next to the hand brake, there are two drinks holders Fig. 158.

WARNING

Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres, when braking suddenly or in case of an acci- dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald- ing.

Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), since they could cause in- jury in the case of an accident.

When travelling, the drinks holder should always be closed to prevent risk in the event of sudden breaking or accident.

Front ashtray*

Fig. 159 Ashtray in the centre console.

Opening and closing the ashtray

To open the ashtray, lift the cover Fig. 159.

To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.

Electrical power socket

Fig. 160 Front power socket.

The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can also be used for other electrical components with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When the engine is switched off, however, the vehi- cle battery will discharge. For further informa- tion see page 255.

WARNING

The power sockets and the connected acces- sories will only operate when the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

151

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Note

The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery dis- charge.

Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in page 255.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 161 Lighter.

Press on the cigarette lighter Fig. 161 to activate it .

Wait for the lighter to spring out.

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil.

WARNING

Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start a fire.

Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns and serious injuries.

The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone in- side the vehicle.

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Fig. 162 Position heavy items as far forward as possible.

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in the luggage compartment. Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could affect safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- ble in the luggage compartment Fig. 162.

Place the heavy objects first.

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings* page 154.

Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or with non-elastic straps secured to the fas- tening* rings.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the lug- gage compartment could cause serious inju- ries.

Always stow objects in the luggage com- partment and secure them with the fastening rings*.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or even third parties. This increased risk of injury will be further in- creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat- ing airbag. If this happens, objects may shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in- jury.

Always keep all objects in the luggage com- partment and use appropriate grips to secure them, particularly in the case of heavy ob- jects.

152

Transport and practical equipment

Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If said weights are exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in- juries and damage to the vehicle.

Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to avoid accidents.

Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- cially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Please observe the notes on the page 71.

CAUTION

Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause damage.

Note

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- ing to the load. When necessary, check the tyre pressures on the adhesive label stuck to

the back of the front left door frame page 279.

Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compartment. Ensure that the ventilation slots are never covered.

Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ing rings* are commercially available from ac- cessory shops.

Rear shelf

Fig. 163 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and installing the rear shelf.

Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and installing the rear shelf.

Removing

Detach the cord loops Fig. 163 B from their hooks A .

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ports Fig. 164 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- der the luggage compartment double floor page 155.

Fitting

Insert the cover horizontally so that the re- cess fits onto the axis of the supports Fig. 164 and press down until it engages.

Hook the loops Fig. 163 B to the rear lid.

153

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve- hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.

CAUTION

Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.

An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat- ed and it may be bent or damaged.

If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.

Note

Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi- bility is not reduced.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 165 Location of fastening rings in lug- gage compartment.

There may be some fastening rings included in the luggage compartment for fastening luggage and other objects Fig. 165 (ar- rows).

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the lug- gage compartment on page 152.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this object generates a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effec- tive weight of the object increases to approxi- mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as it flies through the interior of the vehicle. This in-

creased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- bag.

WARNING

If pieces of baggage or other objects are se- cured to the fastening rings with inappropri- ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event of braking manoeu- vres or accidents.

Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.

154

Transport and practical equipment

Luggage compartment variable floor

Fig. 166 Luggage compartment variable floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 167 Luggage compartment variable floor: sloped position.

Variable floor in the high position

Lift the floor using handle Fig. 166 1

and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .

Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the low position

Lift the floor using handle 1 and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .

Now match the front part with the lower grooves of the supports and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and lower the floor at the same time with the han- dle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

Lift the variable floor using handle 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until the floor folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself.

Rest the floor on its housings Fig. 167 (arrows).

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking manoeu- vre, or in the event of an accident, objects could be flung though the interior and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Always secure objects, even when the lug- gage compartment floor is properly lifted.

Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised lug- gage compartment floor.

Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compart- ment floor.

CAUTION

The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 150 kg.

155

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Other- wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Note

SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure objects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems can- not be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri- er system should be disassembled.

When they are not used.

When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING

When heavy or bulky loads are transported on the roof carrier system, car driving per- formance is affected, as the centre of gravity shifts and there is greater wind resistance.

Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.

Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg- ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of gravity and driving performance.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.

CAUTION

Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier system before entering a car wash.

Vehicle height is increased by the installa- tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this purpose, check that your vehicle's height does not sur- pass the headspace limit, for example, for un- derpasses or for entering garage doors.

Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or loads secured to them must not interfere with the roof aerial or block the path of the rear lid.

On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment

When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roof car- rier system

Fig. 168 Attachment points for the roof rail- ings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe- cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, special fixtures must be used to safely trans- port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- rier system properly. Always take the assem- bly instructions that come with the crossbars

156

Transport and practical equipment

and the roof carrier system in question into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- ings. The distance between cross bars Fig. 168 A should be 75 cm and the dis- tance between the cross bars and the brack- ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries.

Always take the manufacturer assembly in- structions into account.

Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys- tem when they are in perfect condition and are properly secured.

Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly.

Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them after you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threaded joints whenever you stop for a rest.

Always fit the special roof carrier systems correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.

Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system carefully and keep them in the vehi- cle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- stalled .

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof .

Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly .

Check attachments

Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted con- nections and attachments after a short jour- ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- cy.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and considerable vehi- cle damage.

Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi- cle's maximum authorised weight.

Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached.

Secure heavy items as far forward as possi- ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause acci- dents and injuries.

Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.

Secure the load properly.

157

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cool- ing

General notes

Read the additional information carefully page 48

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- rier against impurities in the outside air, in- cluding dust and pollen.

For the climate control system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must be replaced at the specified intervals in the Maintenance Programme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas reaching very high pollution levels, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents.

Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,

so as to maintain good visibility of everything outside.

The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Only drive when you have good visibility.

Always ensure that you use the heating system, fresh air system, air conditioner and the heated rear window to maintain good visi- bility to the outside.

Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- duce driver concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

CAUTION

If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with the A/C button to

prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. There- fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised workshop.

Note

If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- sure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over.

The air from the vents flows through the ve- hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this pur- pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct- ing these slots with any kind of object.

The air conditioner operates most effective- ly with the windows closed. However, if the temperature inside the vehicle is excessive because of the sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening the windows for a short time.

Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition- ing system leaves residue on the evaporator, producing a permanent unpleasant odour.

158

Air conditioning

At low outside temperatures, the compres- sor switches off automatically and cannot be switched on even with the AUTO button.

It is advisable to turn on the air condition- ing at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system.

To ensure correct operation, the grilles on both sides of the screen must not be obstruc- ted.

When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

Economic use of the air conditioning

When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine power and has influence on fuel consumption. Consider the following points in order to have the system operating in the minimum possible time.

If the vehicle interior has overheated due to an excessive solar radiation, it is best to open the windows or doors to allow the hot air to escape.

While in motion, the air conditioning should not be switched on if the windows are open.

Air outlets

Fig. 169 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- lation in the vehicle interior, air vents Fig. 169 1 should remain open.

The outlets can be closed or opened sepa- rately using the slats and the air flow direc- ted according to need.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell and in the rear area of the interior.

159

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi- tive objects should never be placed in front of the air outlets as they may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the air vents.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic, from entering the interior.

If the air distribution is in the thaw position, the recirculation flap will always be open (in- dicator light off).

If the air distribution is switched from any po- sition to the thaw position, recirculation will be automatically deactivated.

Connecting the recirculation

In any air distribution position except thaw:

Press button , the buttons lamp will light up, indicating that air recirculation in- side the vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculation

In any air distribution position except thaw:

Press button again and the button's lamp will go off, indicating that air entry from the outside has been activated.

In the thaw position the entry of air into the vehicle interior is always from the out- side.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioner is switched off, the windows can

quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note

When engaging reverse gear, the air recir- culation is connected automatically to pre- vent the entrance of exhaust gases in the ve- hicle on travelling backwards. The control lamp on the button does not light up.

If the temperature regulator is turned to the coldest setting (blue point) and the button is on, the Air recirculation function is auto- matically activated in order to cool the vehi- cle faster using less energy, and its control lamp will light up.

If the function is not deactivated by press- ing the button, it will deactivate after approx- imately 20 minutes.

160

Air conditioning

Heating and fresh air

Controls

Fig. 170 Heating controls on the dash panel.

Temperature regulator page 162.

Blower control. There are four speed set- tings for the blower. The blower should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.

Air distribution regulator.

Air recirculation button page 160. When the function is activated, a warning light on the button is turned on.

Heated rear window.

Air distribution

Control 3 for setting the flow of air in the re- quired direction.

1

2

3

Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist. For safety reasons, it is not recommended to switch air recirculation on.

Air distribution to upper body.

Air distribution to footwell

Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell.

WARNING

For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct

operation of the heating and ventilation sys- tem, including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.

Note

Please consider the general notes page 158.

161

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Functions

Ventilating the vehicle interior

The desired temperature inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient tempera- ture.

Turn the temperature selector Fig. 170 1 anti-clockwise.

Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels 1-4.

Set the airflow to the desired direction us- ing air distribution control 3 .

Open the relevant air outlets.

Interior heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Turn the temperature selector Fig. 170 1 clockwise to select the re- quired temperature.

Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels 1-4.

Set the airflow to the desired direction us- ing air distribution control 3 .

Open the relevant air outlets.

Defrosting the windscreen

Turn the temperature regulator Fig. 170 1 clockwise to reach the maxi- mum temperature.

Turn the blower switch 2 to level 4.

Turn air distribution control to .

Close the central outlets.

Open and turn the side outlets towards the windows.

Keeping the windscreen and the side win- dows demisted

Turn the temperature regulator Fig. 170 1 to the heating zone.

Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels 2-3.

Turn air distribution control to .

Close the central outlets.

Open and turn the side outlets towards the windows.

Once the windows are demisted and as a pre- ventive measure, the control 3 can be set in position greater comfort while preventing the windows from misting again.

Note

Remember that the temperature of the engine coolant should be optimum to ensure that the heating system functions correctly (except in vehicles fitted with additional heating*).

162

Air conditioning

Manual air conditioning*

Controls

Fig. 171 Air conditioning controls on the dash panel.

Temperature selector page 163

Blower control. There are four speed set- tings for the blower. At low speed, it is recommended to set the blower to a mini- mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh air.

Air distribution regulator.

Air recirculation button page 160. When the function is activated, a warning light on the button is turned on.

Heated rear window.

Button to switch on air conditioning page 163. The air conditioning system

1

2

3

only works when the engine is running and the fan is switched on.

WARNING

For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa- miliarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, includ- ing the demist/defrost functions for the win- dows.

Note

Please consider the general notes.

Functions

Interior heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Disconnect the cooling system using the Fig. 171 button (the button light turns off).

Turn the temperature regulator 1 to set the desired temperature inside the vehicle.

Turn the blower switch to any of the set- tings 1-4.

163

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Set the air distribution regulator 3 to the air flow configuration desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest), (towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and footwell areas).

Interior cooling

When the air conditioning is switched on, the temperature and the air humidity go down. This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, the air conditioning prevents the misting of the windows and therefore, comfort is im- proved.

Turn on the cooling system using the button (the button light turns on).

Turn the temperature control switch until the desired interior temperature is reached.

Turn the blower switch to any of the set- tings 1-4.

Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest), (to- wards the footwell) and (towards the wind- screen and footwell areas).

Demisting the windscreen

Turn air distribution to .

Turn the fan control to one of the two levels depending on the speed required.

Rotate the temperature control to the de- sired level of comfort.

Close the central outlets.

Open and turn the side outlets towards the windows.

If the air conditioning does not work, this may be due to the following reasons:

The engine is stationary.

The fan blower is switched off.

The outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +3C (+37F).

The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched off because of an increased engine coolant temperature.

The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a specialised work- shop.

164

Air conditioning

Climatronic*

General notes

Fig. 172 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully page 49

Climatronic automatically maintains a com- fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- cally regulates the supplied air temperature and the blower and air distribution levels. The system also allows for the effect of sun- light, so there is no need for manual adjust- ment.

Automatic operation guarantees maximum comfort any time of year page 166.

Climatronic description

Cooling only works if the following conditions are met:

The engine is running

the outside temperature is above +2C (+36F);

turned on.

Starting the Climatronic

When a button is pressed, the corresponding function will be activated (except for the recir- culation button), switching on the air condi- tioning if it was switched off.

Switching off the Climatronic

Adjust fan power to zero Fig. 172 2 or press the button.

In order to ensure engines subject to heavy loads are cooled, the air conditioning com- pressor is switched off in the event of high coolant temperatures.

Recommended setting for all seasons of the year

Set the required temperature. We recom- mend +22C (72F).

Press the button Fig. 172.

165

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di- rected slightly upwards.

Change between degrees Centigrade and de- grees Fahrenheit

Keep the and buttons held down for 2 seconds at the same time. The data is dis- played on the screen in the units required.

Automatic mode

Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- stant temperature and demist the windows inside the vehicle.

Set the interior temperature between +16C (+64F) and +29C (+84F).

Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di- rected slightly upwards.

Press the button, AUTO is displayed on the screen.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing the air distribution buttons or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. However, the temperature remains regulated.

Adjusting the temperature

When you switch on the ignition, control 1

Fig. 172 can be used to set the required in- terior temperature.

It is possible to select interior temperatures from +16C (+64F) to +29C (+84F). In this

range the temperature is regulated automati- cally. If a temperature below +16C (+64F) is selected, LO is displayed on the screen. If a temperature above +29C (+84F) is selected, HI is displayed on the screen. At both ex- tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool- ing or heating power, respectively. The tem- perature is not regulated.

In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu- larly the footwells) and significant differen- ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi- cle, sensitive people may catch cold.

Fan regulation

Climatronic automatically regulates blower speed according to the interior temperature. It is possible, however, to set the blower speed to suit requirements.

Press the 2 buttons to increase or reduce fan speed.

Climatronic will switch off when the blower switches off.

Turn on windscreen defrost

Press the button Fig. 172.

Switching off windscreen defrosting

Press the button several times or press the button.

The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output from the vents Fig. 169 2

is increased.

WARNING

Read and observe the safety warnings in General notes on page 158.

Note

A visit to the specialised service once a year is recommended to clean the Climatronic system.

The interior temperature sensor is at the bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the like, as this could have a negative effect on Climatronic operations.

166

Driving

Driving

Address

Introduction

The power steering is not hydraulic but elec- tromechanical. The advantage of this steer- ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other parts. The electromechanical system saves fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs con- tinuous oil pressure, electromechanical steering only needs power when it is used.

In vehicles with electromechanical steering, the assisted steering function automatically adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering wheel torque and wheel orientation. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

WARNING

If the power steering does not work, you will need much more strength to turn the wheel. This has a considerable effect on vehicle safety.

The power steering only works when the engine is running.

Never allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off.

Never remove the key from the ignition while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock

could be engaged and vehicle steering would not work.

Note

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

Control lamp

The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.

It lights up red

The electromechani- cal steering is dam- aged.

Have the steering checked im- mediately by a specialised work- shop.

It lights up yellow

Electromechanical steering operation is limited.

See a specialised workshop im- mediately and have the steering checked. If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again after the en- gine is restarted and the vehicle has travelled a short distance, you do not need to take it to a specialised workshop.

It lights up yellow

The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has been recon- nected.

Take the vehicle for a short run at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is tight.

Turn the wheel a little to both sides.

The steering column does not unlock or lock.

Remove the key from the ignition and switch the ignition back on. If necessary, check the messag- es displayed on the instrument panel display. Do not drive on if the steering column remains locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek specialist assistance.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- dents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es.

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

167

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Note

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- sponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Information relating to different vehi- cle processes.

In order to make the vehicle more difficult to steal, you should always lock the steering be- fore leaving the vehicle.

Mechanical steering lock

The steering column is locked when the key is removed from the ignition lock and the ve- hicle is stationary.

Activating the steering lock

Park the vehicle page 174.

Remove the ignition key.

Turn the steering wheel slightly until the steering lock has engaged.

Deactivating the steering lock

Turn the steering wheel slightly to release the lock.

Insert the key in the ignition lock.

Hold the steering wheel in this position and switch on the ignition.

Electromechanical steering

In vehicles with electromechanical steering, the assisted steering function automatically adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering wheel torque and wheel orientation. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

You should take into account that you will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is not working correctly or at all.

Power-assisted steering

Power-assisted steering helps the driver in critical situations. In counter-steering, it as- sists by applying additional torque .

WARNING

Power-assisted steering, together with the ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle steer- ing in critical situations. However, the driver is ultimately responsible for steering the ve- hicle at all times. Power-assisted steering does not remove this responsibility.

Starting and stopping the en- gine

Ignition key positions

Fig. 173 Ignition key positions.

Read the additional information carefully page 30

Ignition switched off, steering lock 1

In this position Fig. 173, the ignition and the engine are OFF and the steering may be locked.

For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should al- ways lock the steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle theft .

168

Driving

Switching the ignition or the glow plug sys- tem on 2

Turn the ignition key to this position and re- lease it. If the key cannot be turned or it is difficult to turn from position 1 to position

2 , move the steering wheel from one side to the other; this will release it.

Starting 3

The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical devices with high power consumption are switched off temporarily at the same time.

Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- nition key must be turned to position 1 . The repetitive start prevention lock of the igni- tion prevents possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand- still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme- diately blocked- Risk of accident!

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, resulting in an acci- dent.

Unsupervised use of the key could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric windows. This could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

The starter motor will only work when the en- gine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ).

Electronic immobiliser SAFE

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser automatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

If the following message* is shown on the in- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle cannot be started.

The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.

Note

A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- oughly and hold it in this position for the starter to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to the starting posi- tion page 168.

Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en- gine starts; the starter motor must not run on with the engine.

After starting a very hot engine, you may need to slightly press down the accelerator.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 100, Fuses.

169

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventila- ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con- tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col- ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness and result in death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION

When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- hicle in order to start it, you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Please observe and follow the notes on the page 67, How to jump start.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the

engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- oughly and hold it in this position for the starter to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to position Fig. 173 2 . The warning lamp will light for en-

gine pre-heating.

When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition key to position 3 to start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the en- gine starts. The starter motor should not turn at the same time.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If there are problems starting the engine, see the page 67.

Glow plug system for the diesel engine

To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- tery, do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat- ing.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp goes out.

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry

If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal (up to one mi- nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because the fuel system must elimi- nate air first.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Starting petrol engines on page 170.

CAUTION

When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- hicle in order to start it, you should first try to

170

Driving

start it using the battery of another vehicle. Please observe and follow the notes on the page 67, How to jump start.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. You should drive off as soon as you start the en- gine. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle.

Turn the ignition key to position Fig. 173 1 .

After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compartment or due to its prolonged expo- sure to solar radiation.

WARNING

Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is completely stationary.

The brake servo works only when the en- gine is running. With the engine switched off, more strength is needed to brake. As normal

brake operation cannot be performed, risk of accidents and serious injury may exist.

The steering lock can be immediately blocked once the key is removed from the ig- nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.

Power-assisted steering does not work when the engine is off, and more strength is needed to turn the wheel.

If the key is removed from the ignition lock the steering lock could be engaged and vehi- cle steering would not work.

CAUTION

When the engine has been running under a heavy load for a long period, heat can accu- mulate in the engine compartment and cause engine damage. For this reason, idle the en- gine for approximately 2 minutes before switching it off.

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. Make sure that the igni- tion is switched off before leaving the vehi- cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.

Starter button*

Fig. 174 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: starter button.

Fig. 175 On the right of the steering column: emergency start.

The vehicle engine can be started with a starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats.

171

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

Briefly push the starter button without touch- ing the brake or clutch pedal .

For vehicles with both manual and automatic transmission, the starter button text START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching the ignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-off

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve- hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on, the ignition is not switched off automati- cally. The ignition is switched off automati- cally by pressing the lock button on the re- mote control or manually by pressing the sensor surface on the door lever Fig. 141

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ample, the battery of the vehicle key button is very low or flat:

Immediately after pushing the starter but- ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right

trim of the steering column Fig. 175, as close as possible to the Kessy logo.

The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ond .

The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve- hicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- matic engine shutdown is active, if:

The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

the driver does not step on any pedal,

the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light re- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.

When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury.

Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- ised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and, in this way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the windows).

Note

Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- ate, take into account the instructions on the screen of the dash panel.

172

Driving

If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be pos- sible to start the engine.

In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in the engine starting if it requires preheating.

If during the STOP phase you press the START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.

If the indication Start-Stop system deacti- vated: Start the engine manually is dis- played on the dash panel display, the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine 3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button

Step Starting the engine with the starter button page 171.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is performed.

1a. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and hold the clutch down until the engine starts.

2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selec- tor lever in position P or N.

Step Starting the engine with the starter button page 171.

3.

Briefly press the starter button Fig. 174 without pressing the accelerator. For the en- gine to start there must be a valid key in the vehicle. After starting the engine, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed

light indicating that the engine has started.

4.

If the engine does not start, stop and wait for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If nec- essary, perform an emergency start page 172.

5. Disconnect the hand brake when you are about to start driving page 174.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle with the engine run- ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en- gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a sudden increase in the engine speed.

Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION

The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to start the engine while

driving or if you restart it immediately after switching it off.

If the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap- id acceleration.

Do not start the engine by pushing the ve- hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

Do not wait until the engine warms up with the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi- bility through the windows, start driving im- mediately. This helps the engine reach oper- ating temperature faster and reduces emis- sions.

Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts.

When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor- mal, and no cause for concern.

When the outside temperature is below +5C (+41F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

173

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Stopping the engine 3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button

Step Switch off the engine with the starter button page 171.

1. Stop the vehicle completely .

2. Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4 is performed.

3. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place the selector lever in position P.

4. Apply the handbrake page 174.

5.

Briefly press the start-up button Fig. 174. The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If the engine fails to switch off, perform an emergency disconnect page 172.

6. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is moving. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.

The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off.

The brake servo does not work with the en- gine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

Power steering does not work when the en- gine is not running. You need more strength to steer when the engine is switched off.

If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossible to control the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine is made to work hard for a long time, it may overheat after being switched off. To prevent damage to the engine before switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi- nutes in neutral.

Note

After switching off the engine, the cooling fan may continue to operate in the engine com- partment for a few more minutes, even with the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati- cally switched off.

My Beat Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle igni- tion system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening the doors with the remote control, the START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at-

tention to the relevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With the engine switched off, after a few seconds,

the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing and goes out.

With the engine running, the START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The time that lapses between the moment the user starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP

button and the lighting changes from flash- ing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. Upon switching the igni- tion off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it starts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional in- formation:

When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- ton stays on, since, even though the engine is off, the Start-Stop system is active.

When the engine cannot be stated again with the Start-Stop system, page 196, and needs to be started manually, the START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate

this fact.

Braking and parking

Braking capacity and braking distance

The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. This wear depends to

174

Driving

a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi- cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by technical serv- ices more frequently than recommended in the Maintenance Programme.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef- fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in this case, the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

WARNING

Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents.

New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km. This reduced braking capacity may be compensated for by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder, which also applies when the brake pads have to be changed further on.

If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking power may be lower than normal.

On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or

range (depending on the type of transmis- sion). Thus, make use of engine braking and relieve the brakes.

Never let the brakes drag by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking dis- tance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is in- creased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- ficiency of the brakes.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant in- structions page 255, Modifications.

If a brake system circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased considerably. Con- tact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Control lamp

Situations in which the warning lamp lights up *

the brake fluid level is too low page 275.

there is a fault in the brake system.

This warning lamp can light up together with the ABS system warning lamp.

WARNING

If the brake warning lamp does not go out or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low so there is a risk of an accident page 275, Brake fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up to- gether with the ABS lamp this could be due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Handbrake

Fig. 176 Handbrake between the front seats. 175

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling away. Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lever up firmly Fig. 176.

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- lease knob in the direction of the arrow Fig. 176 and guide the handbrake lever down fully .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so there is less risk of driving off with it still en- gaged .

The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied and the igni- tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is released.

WARNING

Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- cle when it is in motion. The braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci- dent!

If the handbrake is only partially released, this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident. This al-

so causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.

CAUTION

Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehi- cles with an automatic gearbox, place the gear lever in position P.

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap- plied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park- ing the vehicle:

Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

Apply the handbrake.

Put it in 1st gear.

Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

Always take you keys with you when you leave the vehicle .

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point to- wards the kerb.

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the kerb.

Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING

Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.

Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle occupants.

Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- ample, by releasing the handbrake or the gearbox lever.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- cle. This can be fatal.

176

Driving

Braking and stability systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

This Electronic Stability System reduces the risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's stability and ability to hold the road.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (ASR). The ESC works together with the ABS. Both control lamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are faulty.

The ESC system is started automatically when the engine is started.

The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys- tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR or else select Sport mode.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable page 178.

For example:

When driving with snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on loose sur- faces.

When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- wards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back on when you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak- ing the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the changes of direction desired by the driver, and constant- ly compares them with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati- cally.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end slides out), the system will act on the front wheel on the outside of the turn.

Control lamp

There are two control lamps for the electronic stability control. The lamp provides infor- mation concerning function and disconnec- tion status.

Both control lamps light up together when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

This programme includes the ABS, EDL and ASR. It also includes emergency braking as- sistance (BAS).

The control lamp has the following func- tions:

It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC is activated.

It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC.

As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS.

If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on again. If the control lamp goes out, this means the system is fully functional.

The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:

It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected or if you select ESC Sport mode, only by means of Easy Connect.

WARNING

Do not forget that the electronic stability control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situa- tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not encourage you to run any risks.

177

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

CAUTION

To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce en- gine power when this is not desired.

Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, run- ning gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.

Traction control system (ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driv- en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.

Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration (ASR)

The ASR system intervenes by reducing en- gine power and preventing the driven wheels from slipping during acceleration.

TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

The ASR automatically switches on when the engine is started. If necessary, it could be switched on or off using the Easy Connect system*.

When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights up . The ASR should normally be left on. Only in exceptional circumstances, when wheel spin is required, it can be turned off using the Easy Connect system menu, for ex- ample:

With compact temporary spare wheel.

When using the snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on soft ter- rain.

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking it.

The ASR should be switched on again as soon as possible.

Control lamp

There are three control lamps for the traction control system: (for vehicles equipped with M-ABS), (for vehicles equipped with ESC) and . Both control lamps light up to- gether when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approximately 2 sec- onds, which is the time taken for the function check.

The or lamp has the following function:

It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve- hicle is moving.

If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The

warning lamp will also light up if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ASR op- erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur- ther information, see page 178.

The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:*

It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected via Easy Connect.

By means of Easy Connect, the ASR function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched off.

WARNING

Remember that not even the ASR can defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situa- tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR should not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION

To ensure that the ASR works correctly, identical tyres should be fitted on all four wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, run- ning gear or to the combination of wheels

178

Driving

and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS and ASR.

Connecting/disconnecting ESC and ASR*

The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR and ESC function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient, among others:

When driving in deep snow or on surfaces that are not very firm.

To free the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR and ESC function back on.

Depending on finishes and versions, it is possible either to disconnect only the ASR or else activate ESC Sport mode.

ESC in Sport mode

Sport mode can be connected via the Easy Connect page 118 system menu. The ESC and the traction control system (ASR) have only a limited ability to stabilise the vehicle.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with a driver information system*, the driver

will be shown the electronic stability control (ESC) option: sport. Warning! Limited stability.

Disable ESC Sport mode

Through the Easy Connect system menu page 118. The warning lamp will switch off. For vehicles with a driver information sys- tem*, the driver will be shown the elec- tronic stability control (ESC) option: on.

Disable ASR

The Easy Connect system menu is used to switch off the ASR page 118. The traction control system will be disabled.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR

The Easy Connect system menu page 118 is used to switch on the ASR. The traction control system will be enabled.

The control lamp switches off. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that ASR is enabled.

Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func- tion in the Easy Connect system by means of the button and the SETTINGS and ESC System function buttons.

WARNING

You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on- ly if the traffic conditions and your driving ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid- ding!

With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sportier drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.

Note

If the ASR is disconnected or the ESCs Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will be switched off.

Electronic differential lock (EDS)*

The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi- cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con- trol (ESC)*.

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel- erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi- tions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed of the driven wheels.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h (50 mph), it is able to balance out differences in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially slippery road surface. It does this by braking

179

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

the wheel which has lost traction and distrib- uting more driving force to the other driven wheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

Control lamp

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accel- erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.

Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in- to taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

CAUTION

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en- gine, the brake system, running gear or any

components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the EDL page 255.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*

The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is only included in vehicles with ESC.

In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force. This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.

This is when the brake assist system comes into action. When pressing the brake pedal rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer- gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing braking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped- al, since the brake assist system switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.

Automatic hazard warning lights activation

The brake lights flash automatically to indi- cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in an emergency situation. If the emergency braking continues until the vehicle comes to a standstill, the hazard warning lights will then come on and the brake lights will re- main on permanently from that moment. The

warning lights will automatically switch off when the vehicle begins to move again or when the "warning" light button is pressed.

WARNING

The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep your distance from the vehicle in front, and when the road sur- face is slippery or wet. The increased acci- dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as- sist system.

The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents the wheels from locking during braking and is an important part of the vehicle's active safety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela- tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure to this wheel. The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is

180

Driving

a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has intervened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu- late the brake application. Do not pump.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is retained as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all conditions. Braking distance could even be further if you brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip- pery surface.

Control lamp

The control lamp lights up for a few sec- onds when the ignition is switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The control lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.

The control lamp does not go out again af- ter a few seconds.

The control lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-

cle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the tyre pressure control lamp will also light up.

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp , there is a fault in the ABS function and in the brake system .

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea- tures tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted page 278.

If the running gear or brake system is modi- fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- verely limited.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 267, Working in the engine compartment.

If the brake system warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 275, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Electronic differential lock (XDS)*

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- er wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer or lengthening of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

181

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque of that wheel. This means that the driver's desired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR traction control is disconnected or the ESC is in Sport mode.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident. The braking dis- tance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

If the brake servo is not working, for exam- ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.

Hill driving assistant*

Fig. 177 Related video

This function is only included in vehicles with ESC.

The hill driving assistant helps the driver to move off and upward on a hill when the vehi- cle is stationary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap- proximately two seconds after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from lurching backward when it is started. During these 2 seconds, the driver has enough time to release the clutch pedal and accelerate without the vehicle moving and without having to use the handbrake, making start-up easier, more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

being on a ramp or hill/slope,

doors closed,

vehicle completely stationary,

engine running and foot on the brake,

besides having a gear engaged or being in neutral for manual gear change and with the selector lever at position S, D or R for an au- tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up- hill.

WARNING

If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped- al or use the hand brake immediately.

When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down for a few seconds before starting off.

Note

The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with this system.

182

Driving

Manual gearbox

Driving with manual gearbox

Read the additional information carefully page 47

Certain versions of the model may include a 6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is shown on the gearbox lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when the car is stationary. When the engine is run- ning and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gear- box.

The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on.

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engag- ed and the clutch released.

Never select the reverse gear when the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note

Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary wear and damage.

Do not slip the clutch to hold the vehicle on a hill. This causes premature wear and damage to the clutch.

Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; although the pressure may seem insignifi- cant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear.

Automatic gearbox/DSG auto- matic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- mitted via two independent clutches. They re- place the torque converter found on conven- tional automatic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually if desired page 185, Changing gears in tiptronic mode*.

Selector lever positions

Read the additional information carefully page 47

The selector lever position engaged is high- lighted on the display in the instrument clus- ter. With the selector lever in the manual gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged gear is also indicated on the display.

P Parking lock

When the selector lever is in this position, the driven wheels are locked mechanically. The parking lock must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary .

The interlock button (the button on the selec- tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si- multaneously the brake pedal must be de- pressed before moving the selector lever ei- ther in or out of position P.

R Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .

To move the selector lever to position R, the interlock button must be pressed in and at the same time the brake pedal must be de- pressed. The reverse lights come on when the selector lever is in the R position with the ignition on.

183

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

N Neutral (idling)

With the selector lever in this position, the gear is in neutral.

D/S Permanent drive (forward) position

The selector lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move the selector lever backwards. Moving the lev- er again will select normal mode (D). The se- lected driving mode is shown on the instru- ment panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical- ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the engine's maximum power output. When ac- celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selector lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic mode page 185, in order to manually select gear ratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING

Take care not to accidentally press the ac- celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- mediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.

With selector lever in any position (except P) the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to creep. The accelerator pedal must on no account be pressed inadvertently when a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- mediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.

While you are selecting a gear and the vehi- cle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.

As a driver you should never leave your ve- hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en- gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply the handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).

To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake and put the selector lever in position P before opening the bonnet and working on the vehi-

cle with the engine running. Please always observe the important safety warnings page 267, Working in the engine compart- ment.

Note

If the selector lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before se- lecting gear range D or S again.

Should the power supply to the selector lever be interrupted in position P, the selector lever will be locked. If this should happen the manual release can be used page 48.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 178 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

184

Driving

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Switch the ignition on.

Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, hold the lock button in the direction of the arrow Fig. 178.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition switched on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and N. The brake pedal must be pressed to release the lever while pressing the release button if the selector lever is in the position P. As a re- minder for the driver, with the lever in posi- tions P or N the following message will be shown on the display:

When stationary, apply footbrake while selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the lever lock is automatically deactivated in position N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through posi- tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto- matically if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about two seconds.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from inadvertently engaging certain gears. Press the button in to disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in position P. While the key is not in the ig- nition, the selector lever is locked in position P.

Note

If the selector lever lock does not engage, there is a fault. The transmission is interrup- ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally moving. Follow the procedure below in order for the selector lever lock to engage again:

With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal and release it again.

With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal. Move the selector lever to posi- tion P or N and subsequently engage a gear.

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle does not move forwards or back. Proceed to the next mode:

When the vehicle does not move in the required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engaged. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again.

If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system mal- function. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

Changing gears in tiptronic mode*

Fig. 179 Centre console: changing gear with tiptronic

Fig. 180 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox levers

185

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

The tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selector lever

It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.

To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se- lector lever from position D/S to the right. As soon as the change is made the selector level will be shown in the position M on the instrument panel display (for example M4 means that the fourth gear is engaged).

Move the selector lever forwards + to se- lect a higher gear Fig. 179.

Move the selector lever backwards to select a lower gear.

Changing gear manually with the gearshift paddles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the position D/S or M.

Press the gearshift paddle + to select a higher gear Fig. 180.

Press the gearshift paddle to select a lower gear.

With the selector lever in position D/S, if no paddle is operated during a short period of time, the gearbox control system switches back to automatic mode. To switch to per-

manent manual gear change using the gearshift paddles, move the selector lever from position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automatical- ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear- box will not shift down until there is no risk of over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, the gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend- ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- ly as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, below -10C (50F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle

Press and hold the brake pedal.

Press and hold the interlock button (the button on the selector lever handle), move the selector lever to the desired position, for instance D page 183, and release the interlock button.

Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a slight movement can be felt).

Release the brake and press the accelerator .

Stopping briefly

Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle briefly when stationary (for instance at traf- fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking

If the driver door is opened and the selector lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The driver message will be: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

Press and hold the brake pedal .

Apply the handbrake.

Move the selector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill

Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving backwards; if necessary, apply the handbrake . Do not try to stop the vehicle rolling back by increasing the engine speed when a gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator) .

186

Driving

Starting off uphill

Apply the handbrake.

Once you have engaged a gear press the accelerator carefully and disengage the handbrake.

Driving down hills: in some situations (on mountain roads or when towing a trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- ted manually to suit the driving conditions .

On level ground it is sufficient to move the selector lever to position P. On slopes, first engage the parking brake and then put the selection lever into the P position. This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move the selector lev- er from position P.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Selector lever positions on page 184.

Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long periods. Constant braking causes overheating in the brakes. This could significantly reduce brak- ing power, increase braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system.

To avoid rolling back on gradients always hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand- brake if you have to stop.

CAUTION

If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing the accelerator when a gear has been selec- ted. This could cause overheating and dam- age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand- brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling back.

If you allow the car to roll with the selector lever in position N with the engine switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubricated.

In certain driving situations or traffic condi- tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged creeping of the vehicle or traffic jams with continuous stoppages, the gearbox could overheat causing damage! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and wait for the gearbox to cool page 190.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resistance at full throt- tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Launch control programme 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet- rol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables maxi- mum acceleration.

Important: the engine must have reached op- erating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ- ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the launch-control you must disconnect the anti- slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con- nect system menu page 118. The warning lamp will stay switched on or will flash slowly depending on whether or not the vehi- cle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys- tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the corresponding text message Stability control deactivated (temporary) ap- pears on the instrument panel to indicate the deactivation status.

187

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

When the engine is running, switch off the traction control (ASR)1).

Turn the selector lever to the position S or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv- ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* page 225.

Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and hold it down for at least one sec- ond.

With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about 2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING

Always adapt your driving style to the traf- fic conditions.

Only use the launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accel- erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or endanger other road users.

Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin,

causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci- dent!

After putting the vehicle into gear, the sport mode of the ESC should be deactiva- ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but- ton.

Note

After using the Launch control programme, the temperature in the gearbox may have in- creased considerably. In this case, the pro- gramme could be disabled for several mi- nutes. The programme can be used again af- ter the cooling phase.

Accelerating with the Launch control pro- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps the driver when driving down steep gradi- ents.

Downhill speed control is activated when the selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto- matically engages a lower gear that is suita-

ble for the slope. The downhill speed control function attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of physics and technical drive limitations). It may be necessary to adjust the speed again using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv- en that the downhill speed control can only change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de- scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and reduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system* page 198, downhill speed control is acti- vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Always be prepared to use the brakes!

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in- formation system: the warning lamp stays on.

188

Driving

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- tain stretches to be driven without using the accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved. Use the inertia mode to let the vehicle roll before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode

Important: selector lever must be in position D, gradients below 12 %.

Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode page 225.

Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis- played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switch off the engine again, simply press the brake pedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and the switching off using inertia (= shorter section without

the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance.

WARNING

If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an ob- stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal, that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu- al manner: risk of accident!

When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident!

If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.

Note

Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode.

The driver message Inertia is only dis- played with the current consumption. In iner- tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed (for example E will appear instead of E7).

On downhill sections with gradients above 15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be switched off temporarily.

Backup programme

A backup programme is in place if a fault should occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever are shown over a light background on the instru- ment panel display, there is a system fault and the automatic gearbox will operate in with the backup programme. When the back- up programme is activated, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a selected range of gears. In some ca- ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi- ble.

CAUTION

If the gearbox operates with the backup pro- gramme, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

Clutch

Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could be dam- aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear- box to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver message switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay. If the warning lamp and the driver message do not switch off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.

189

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Gearbox malfunctions

Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve- hicle and place the lever in the position P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with re- strictions. Reverse gear disa bled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can con- tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and engage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a high temperature, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.

Gear-change indicator

Selecting the optimal gear

While driving, and depending on vehicle equipment, the instrument panel display may show a recommendation with the gear num- ber that would be advisable to save fuel.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be in the Tiptronic posi- tion page 185.

No recommendation will appear if the opti- mal gear is already engaged. The current gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning

The optimal gear is selected.

Changing to a higher gear is recom- mended.

Changing to a lower gear is recom- mended.

Information regarding the cleanliness of the diesel particulate filter

The exhaust system manager detects that the diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated and contributes to self-cleaning by recom- mending the optimal gear. For this reason, it might be necessary to drive for a short time at a high rpm.

WARNING

The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary function and in no case should be a substi- tute for careful driving.

The responsibility of choosing the correct gear depending on the situation (e.g. over- taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a trailer) lies with the driver.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.

Note

The recommended gear indication turns off when the clutch pedal is pressed in vehicles with manual gearbox or when the selector lever is removed from the Tiptronic position in vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

190

Driving

Run-in and economical driving

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1500 km (900 miles).

For the first 1,000 kilometres (600 miles)

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to 1,500 kilometres (900 miles)

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed or maximum permis- sible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the in- ternal friction in the engine is greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bed- ded in.

For the sake of the environment

If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in- creased and its oil consumption reduced.

Tyre and brake pad run-in

New tyres should be run in carefully for the first 500 km (300 miles) and new brake pads should be run in carefully for the first 200 km (125 miles).

During the first 200 km (125 miles) you have to compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying more pressure to the brake ped- al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than with brake pads which have been run- in.

WARNING

At first, new tyres do not give maximum grip, and require running-in. This may cause an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500 km (300 miles).

New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction properties during the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the re- duced braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufac- ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recy- cling

Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling.

Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling.

Increased use of single-grade materials.

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

Use of recycled materials.

Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated.

Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources.

Reduction of volatile components, includ- ing odour, in plastic materials.

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.

Use of plastic film as protection during ve- hicle transport.

191

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- tems.

Recycling and energy recovery from resi- dues (RDF).

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.).

The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally- friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- pends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an economical driving style and an- ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- tion while saving money are listed below.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate situations, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and

tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner- tia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears. Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. We recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the recommended gear indication that ap- pears on the instrument panel page 190.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross- ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to re- start the engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-

tant emissions are also especially high dur- ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you will not con- sume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the exhaust gas filtration systems should reach the optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine does not warm up and fuel consumption does not nor- malise until having driven approximately four kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom- mend avoiding short trips whenever possi- ble.

192

Driving

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad- equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres- sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuel consumption can increase by as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist- ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is no longer needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused by the roof rack even when it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need for elec- tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be- cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-

ces when you do not need them. Examples of devices that use a lot of electricity are: the blower at high speeds, the rear window heat- ing or the seat heaters*.

Note

If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec- ommended that you switch this function off.

It is recommended that you close the win- dows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph).

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious fault.

Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.

On descents, use the engine brake, chang- ing to the gear that is more suitable for the slope. Fuel consumption will be zero and the brakes will not suffer.

Engine management and ex- haust gas purification system

Introduction

WARNING

Because of the high temperatures which can occur in the exhaust purification system (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil- ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- haust can come into contact with flammable materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at the forest edge). Fire hazard!

Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!

Note

While the control lamps , , or re- main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel consumption may increase and the engine may lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter

Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- verter.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. 193

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil page 272, Top- ping up engine oil.

Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 67.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re- duce speed immediately and have the vehi- cle inspected at the nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light up when any of the described symptoms occur page 117. If this hap- pens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust sys- tem and escape into the environment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur con- tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be solved by changing to another brand of fuel.

Diesel particulate filter 3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is cleaned automatically without need for indi- cation by the warning lamp . This may be noticed because the engine idle speed in- creases and an odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car- ried out (because only short trips are taken, for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning lamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- ess by driving in the following manner: drive for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en- gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil- ter to burn. On completion of the cleaning the warning lamp will switch off. If the warn- ing lamp does not switch off, go immediately to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob- lem.

Engine management*

This warning lamp monitors the engine man- agement system for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con- trol) lights up when the ignition is switched on while system operation is being verified. It should go out once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi- cle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Emission control system*

Control lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.

The control lamp lights up:

If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.

194

Driving

Engine pre-heating/fault system*

The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.

The control lamp lights up

If the control lamp lights up when the en- gine is started it means that the glow plugs are preheating. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off.

Control lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving, the glow plug system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Driving tips

Driving abroad

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Au- tomobile organisations will have information about service station networks selling unlea- ded fuel.

In some countries, it is possible that your car model is not sold, and therefore some spare parts are not available or the technical services may only be able to carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical prep- aration that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for headlights

In countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road to your home country, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers of oncoming vehicles.

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur- ther information is available at any Technical Service.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- ing through water, for example, along a floo- ded road, please observe the following:

The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork.

Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through water, mud, sludge, etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight- ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully several times will remove the moisture and restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION

Driving through flooded areas may severely damage vehicle components such as the en- gine, transmission, running gear or electrical system.

Whenever driving through water, the Start- Stop system* must be switched off page 196.

Note

Check the depth of the water before enter- ing the flooded zone.

Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or stop the engine in any situation.

Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite direction may splash water that could exceed the maximum permitted water height for your vehicle.

Avoid driving through salt water (corro- sion).

195

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Driver assistance systems

Start-Stop System*

Related video

Fig. 181 Convenience

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re- duce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping; for example when stopping at traf- fic lights. The ignition remains switched on during the stopping phase. The engine auto- matically switches back on when required. In this situation, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button stays on1).

As soon as the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys- tem can be found in the Easy Connect sys- tem: by pressing the button in the Vehi- cle status menu.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode

The driver door must be closed.

The driver must have their seat belt fas- tened.

The bonnet must be closed.

The engine must have reached a minimum service temperature.

The reverse gear must not be engaged.

The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

WARNING

Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The brake servo and power steering functions will not be completely cov- ered under warranty. More force may also be needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- ing could lock making it impossible to steer the vehicle.

To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment page 198.

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas page 198.

Stopping/Starting the engine

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

Before stopping the vehicle or when it is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear on the instru- ment panel display. The engine may stop before the vehicle comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at 7 km/h).

When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- gine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a stop and keep the brake pedal pressed down with your foot. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 196

Driver assistance systems

display. The engine may stop before the ve- hicle comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicles gearbox).

When you take your foot off the brake pedal the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to when in manual mode. With the selector lev- er in position P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In order to start the engine up again the accelerator must be pressed, or an- other gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R during the stopping phase, the engine will start up again.

Change from position D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when changing and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox and the ACC function, if the vehicle ahead drives off again, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions.

Note

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle remains stop- ped, the engine will not stop if the brake ped- al is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with fre- quent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop.

In vehicles with manual gearbox, during the stopping phases the brake pedal must re- main depressed to prevent the vehicle from moving.

If the engine stalls in vehicles with man- ual gearbox, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal.

General notes

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode frequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch off

Before the stopping phase, the system veri- fies whether certain conditions are met. The engine does not switch off, in the following situations for example:

The engine has not yet reached the mini- mum required temperature for the Start-Stop mode.

The interior temperature selected for the air conditioner has not yet been reached.

The interior temperature is very high/low.

Defrost function button activated page 48.

The parking aid* is switched on.

The battery is very low.

The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ing turned.

If there is a danger of misting.

After engaging reverse gear.

In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication is shown on the instrument panel display, and in addition, the driver in- formation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself

During a stopping phase the normal Start- Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow- ing situations: The engine restarts by itself without involvement from the driver.

The interior temperature differs from the value selected on the air conditioner.

Defrost function button activated page 48.

The brake has been pressed several times consecutively.

The battery is too low.

High power consumption. 197

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Note

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the selector lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to conditions in which the engine can be stopped.

Manually switching on/off the Start- Stop system

Fig. 182 Centre console: Start-Stop system button.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually.

To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop system, press the button . The button symbol remains lit up yellow when the sys- tem is switched off.

Note

The system is automatically switched on each time the engine is deliberately stopped dur- ing a stopping phase. The engine will start automatically.

Driver messages on the instrument panel display

Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually This driver message is displayed when cer- tain conditions are not met during the stop- ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot restart the engine. The engine must be star- ted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Func- tion not available There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault repaired.

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Operation

Fig. 183 Instrument panel display: CCS status indications.

Read the additional information carefully page 42

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas- ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the vehicle .

198

Driver assistance systems

Control lamp

Lights up

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and ac- tive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is switch- ed on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

Displayed on the CCS screen

Status Fig. 183:

CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small or darkened figures.

System error. Contact a specialised work- shop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is displayed in large figures.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci- dents and severe injuries if it is not possible

A

B

C

D

to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety distance.

Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf- fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads.

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.

To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you fin- ish using it.

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.

When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Warning symbols on page 117.

Operating the cruise control system*

Read the additional information carefully page 42

The value indicated in the table in brackets (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru- ment panels with indications in miles.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle down using the brake pedal and reduce gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched off automatically or temporarily:

If the system detects a fault that could af- fect the working order of the CCS.

If you press and maintain the accelerator pedal for a certain time, driving faster than the stored speed.

If the dynamic driving control systems in- tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

If the brake pedal is pressed.

If the airbag is triggered. 199

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

If the gear lever of the DSG dual clutch gearbox is removed from the D/S position.

WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.

The speed limiter does not relieve the driv- er of their responsibility to drive at the appro- priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary.

Using the speed limiter with adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. because of aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You should use the speed limiter function only when traffic, road and weather conditions al- low it to be used safely.

When driving downhill, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will increase due to its own weight. In this case, select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Speed limiter

Display messages and warning and control lamp

Fig. 184 On the instrument panel display: messages on the status of the speed limiter.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a speed individually programmed upwards of approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in forwards gears

Display messages on the speed limiter

Status Fig. 184:

The speed limiter is active. The last speed set is displayed in large figures.

The speed limiter is not active. The last speed set is displayed in small or dark- ened figures.

The speed limiter is switched off. The to- tal mileage is displayed.

A

B

C

Warning and control lamp

Lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded.

Lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiter are active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.

The speed limiter does not relieve the driv- er of their responsibility to drive at the appro- priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary.

Using the speed limiter with adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. because of aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You should use the speed limiter function only when traffic, road and weather conditions al- low it to be used safely.

200

Driver assistance systems

When driving downhill, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will increase due to its own weight. In this case, select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Warning symbols on page 117.

Note

Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary.

If when switching the ignition off, the cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter were switched on, then the cruise control system

or the adaptive cruise control will automati- cally switch themselves on when the ignition is back on. However, no speed will be stored. The last set speed of the speed limiter will be stored.

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 185 On the left of the steering column: control and buttons to operate the speed lim- iter.

Fig. 186 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the speed limiter.

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 185 or the third lever Fig. 186

Effect

Switching on the speed limiter Move controller 1 to position and press button 2 of the turn signal lever or move the third lever forward and press button 2 .

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed lim- iter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

201

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 185 or the third lever Fig. 186

Effect

Switching between the speed limiter and cruise control (CCS) or the adaptive cruise control (ACC) (with the speed limiter switched on)

Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the third lever. The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and the limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed limit- er limitation

Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move the third lever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter limitation pressing down the accelerator (kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to over- take). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off temporarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return- ing to less than the set speed.

Switching the speed limiter on again Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi- tion .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or move the third lever into position to increase the speed in small incre- ments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value Press on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value Press on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to reduce the speed continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

202

Driver assistance systems

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 185 or the third lever Fig. 186

Effect

Switching off the speed limiter Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lever into position .

The system switches off

The values shown in the table in brackets, in mph, are displayed only in instrument panels with indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiter

If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards the warning and control lamps flash page 200 and an acoustic warning may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low- er gear.

Switching off temporarily

If you wish to temporarily switch off the speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control Fig. 185 1 of the turn signal lever into po- sition or the third lever into pressure point or press button 2 on any lever.

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be switched on with the previously set speed by pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or by moving the third lever in- to pressure point.

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by pressing down the accelerator (kick-down)

If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- down) and the set speed is exceeded be- cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic signal sound once. While the limiter is off, the warning and control lamp flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer pressed down and the speed is reduced below the set value, the limiter switches on again. The con- trol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic off

The speed limiter is automatically switched off:

If the system detects a fault that could neg- atively affect the working order of the limiter.

If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTION

For automatic switching off due to system failures, for security reasons, the limiter is only completely switched off when the driver

stops pressing the accelerator at some point or consciously switches off the system.

Area monitoring system (Front Assist) including City emergen- cy braking and pedestrian monitoring*

Introduction

The Front Assist monitoring system can help to avoid rear collisions within the speed range of between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). The system has the Front Assist function with City emergency braking and pedestrian monitoring.

The Front Assist system may warn the driver, within the constraints of the system, of im- pending collisions, prepare the vehicle for emergency braking in case of danger, provide support during braking and apply automatic braking.

The Front Assist is not a replacement for driver awareness.

203

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Distance warning

If the system detects that safety is endan- gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by means of a message on the instrument panel when driving at a speed of between approximately 60 km/h (37 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) Fig. 187.

The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by means of an audible warning and an indica- tion on the instrument panel when driving at a speed of between approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) Fig. 187.

The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking .

Critical warning

If the driver fails to react to the advance warning, the system may actively intervene in the brakes when driving at a speed of be- tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph), generating a brief jolt to warn of the imminent collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the advance warning, the system may brake the vehicle automatically, by progressively increasing braking effect driving at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). By reducing speed in case of a possible collision, the system may contribute to reducing the consequences of an accident.

Front assist

If the Front Assist notices that the driver is not braking sufficiently in case of a collision hazard, the system can increase braking ef- fect and thus avert the collision when driving at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Front assist only acts while the brake pedal is pressed down hard.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics. The driver is always responsible for braking in time. If the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de- pending on the traffic circumstances, you must brake immediately or dodge the obsta- cle.

Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries.

In complex driving situations, the Front As- sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in- tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in traffic islands.

If the operation of the Front Assist is im- paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra- dar sensor has lost its settings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and inter- vene inopportunely in the braking.

During driving, the Front Assist does not re- act to people or animals or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.

The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note

When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder.

Automatic interventions by the Front Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

If the Front Assist does not work as descri- bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

204

Driver assistance systems

On-screen warning lamps and mes- sages

Fig. 187 On the instrument panel display: Warning indications.

Distance warning

If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will appear on the instrument panel display .

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Warning symbols on page 117.

Note

When the Front Assist is connected, the indi- cations on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by warnings from other func- tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 188 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- er to determine the traffic situation Fig. 188 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the Front Assist monitoring system does not work. The instrument panel displays the fol- lowing message: Front Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary clean the ra- dar sensor .

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the Front Assist will automati- cally be available again. The message will disappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen- sor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If structural modifications are made to the ve- hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As- sist operation may be affected. So structural modifications should only be made by speci- alised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

If work is done incorrectly on the front of the vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged or lose its settings, and Front Assist opera- tion may be affected. So repair work should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos- sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

The sensor may become damaged or lose its settings when knocked, for example, dur- ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.

205

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.

Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

Operating the Front Assist monitoring system

Fig. 189 On the instrument panel display: Front Assist switched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning function (pre warn- ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- ways switched on. Exceptions page 207,

Switching the Front Assist off temporarily in the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front As- sist can be switched on and off as follows:

Select the corresponding menu option us- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- tems page 35.

OR: switch the system on and off in Easy Connect using the button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function but-

tons page 33.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru- ment panel will inform that it has been switched off with the following indicator Fig. 189.

Switching the advance warning function on or off

The pre-warning function (advance warning) can be switched on or off in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETTINGS

and Driver assistance function buttons page 33.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the advance warning function switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system in- stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning function may be adjusted as follows:

Ready

Medium

Delayed

Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will appear on the instrument panel display . In this case, increase the safe dis- tance.

The distance warning can be switched on and off in the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function buttons

page 33.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance warning switched on at all times.

206

Driver assistance systems

Switching the Front Assist off tempo- rarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist Monitoring System should be deactivated due to the system's limitations :

When the vehicle is to be towed.

If the vehicle is on a test bed.

When the radar sensor is damaged.

If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for example in a rear collision.

If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

If the radar sensor is covered temporarily with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ditional headlight or the like.

When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ferry or train.

WARNING

If the Front Assist function is not switched off in the situations described, serious accidents and injuries may occur.

Switch off the Front Assist function in criti- cal situations.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita- tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances some of the system's reac-

tions may be inopportune or be delayed from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the Front Assist not to react or to do so too late:

On taking tight bends.

Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- aged.

If the ASR has been disconnected or the ESC activated in Sport mode manually page 179.

If the ESC is controlling.

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged.

If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works.

If the vehicle is reversing.

If the vehicle over-accelerates.

In case of snow or heavy rain.

In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- bikes.

Misaligned vehicles.

Vehicles crossing the other's path.

Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion.

Special loads and accessories of other ve- hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top.

City Emergency braking function

Fig. 190 On the instrument panel display: ad- vance warning message.

The City Emergency braking function is part of Front Assist and is active whenever this system is switched on.

The function can be switched on and off by deactivating the Front Assist function in the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function buttons page 33.

The City Emergency braking function picks up the traffic situation in front of the vehicle at speeds approximately between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 30 km/h (19 mph).

207

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

If the system detects a possible collision with a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares for a possible emergency braking .

If the driver fails to react to a possible colli- sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto- matically, by progressively increasing braking effect driving to reduce speed in the event of a collision. The system can thus help to re- duce the consequences of an accident.

Status display

Automatic deceleration by means of the City Emergency braking function is displayed on the instrument panel by means of the ad- vance warning Fig. 1901).

WARNING

The smart technology included in the City Emergency braking function cannot defy the laws of physics. The driver is always respon- sible for braking in time.

Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

The City Emergency braking function alone cannot prevent accidents or serious injury.

In complex driving situations, the City Emergency braking function may issue unnec- essary warnings and intervene inopportunely in braking, such as in work areas or if there are metal rails.

If the operation of the City Emergency brak- ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its set- tings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking.

During driving, the City Emergency braking function does not react to people or animals or vehicles crossing your path or which ap- proach you head-on in the same lane.

Note

When the City Emergency braking function causes a braking, the brake pedal is hard- er.

Automatic interventions on the brakes by the City Emergency braking function may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera- tor or moving the wheel.

The City Emergency braking function can brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!

If several inopportune intervenes occur, switch off the Front Assist and with it the City Emergency braking function. Take it to a spe- cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

If numerous unnecessary interventions oc- cur, the City Emergency braking function may switch off automatically.

Pedestrian Monitoring*2)

Fig. 191 On the instrument panel display: Advance warning message. Pedestrian Monitoring deactivated.

1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour. 2) Depending on the vehicle equipment, pedestrian monitoring is not available in all countries.

208

Driver assistance systems

The pedestrian monitoring function can help prevent accidents involving pedestrians or mitigate the consequences of an accident.

The function warns of danger of collision, prepares the vehicle for emergency braking, assists in the braking and brakes automati- cally.

If the function detects a possible collision with a pedestrian, it warns the driver with an acoustic signal and a message on the instru- ment panel display Fig. 191.

The pedestrian monitoring system, including the advance warning, turns on automatically when the ignition is switched on page 168.

SEAT recommends always having the pedes- trian monitoring function turned on. The ex- ceptions set out for the Front Assist system are equally valid for the pedestrian monitor- ing system page 207.

Switching the pedestrian monitoring system on and off

With the ignition on, the pedestrian monitor- ing function can be switched on and off as follows:

Switch the system on and off by deactivat- ing the Front Assist function in the Easy Con- nect system using the button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function but-

tons page 33.

When the pedestrian protection system is switched off, the instrument panel display in- dicates this Fig. 191 .

WARNING

The technology in the pedestrian monitoring system cannot defy the laws of physics and only works within the system's limits. The driver is always responsible for braking in time. If the pedestrian monitoring system is- sues a warning, brake the vehicle immediate- ly with the brake pedal or swerve to avoid the pedestrian, depending on traffic conditions.

The pedestrian monitoring system alone cannot avoid accidents or serious injury.

In complex driving situations, the pedes- trian monitoring system may issue unneces- sary warnings and intervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in main roads with turnings.

If the operation of the system is impaired, for example, because the radar sensor and camera are covered or have lost their set- tings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking.

The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note

When the vehicle is braked via the pedes- trian monitoring system, the brake pedal be- comes stiffer.

Automatic interventions by the pedestrian monitoring system on the brakes may be in- terrupted by pressing the accelerator or mov- ing the wheel.

If the pedestrian monitoring system does not work as described in this chapter (e.g. if it intervening unnecessarily several times), switch if off, contact a specialist workshop immediately and request to have the system checked. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*

Related video

Fig. 192 Safety

209

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Introduction

Fig. 193 Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten- sion of the normal cruise control system (CCS) .

The ACC function allows the driver to program a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 km/h (18 and 150 mph) and to select the distance required with regard to the vehicle in front.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, maintaining a safe distance with the vehicle in front based on its speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the ACC function reduces speed until it is the same as that of the vehicle ahead and main- tains the set distance between the vehicles. If the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive cruise control also accelerates, going no higher than the target speed programmed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it stops.

The distance programmed should be in- creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent in the system. In other words, in certain circumstances the driver will have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will warn you to intervene by applying the brake and a warning tone will be heard page 211.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change the laws of physics. If used negli- gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness.

Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, on steep roads, with several bends or in slip- pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads.

Never use the ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- signed for use on paved roads only.

The ACC does not react on approaching a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped at the traffic lights.

The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes- trian monitoring system is available. In addi- tion, the system does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane.

If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient- ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying the pedal.

If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC function could automatically switch off during your journey. Switch off the system when starting off.

If the vehicle continues to move involuntar- ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.

If the dash panel displays a driver interven- tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.

The driver should be ready to accelerate or brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen- sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

210

Driver assistance systems

Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.

Note

If the ACC system does not work as descri- bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

Maximum speed with the ACC activated is limited to 210 km/h (150 mph).

When the ACC is switched on, strange noises may be heard during automatic brak- ing cause by the braking system.

Indications on the display, warning and control lamps

Fig. 194 On the instrument panel display: (A) ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Status display

Indications on the display Fig. 194:

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not active and is not regulating your speed.

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is not active and is not regulating your dis- tance.

1

2

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active and is regulating your speed.

Distance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis- tance based on speed.

Symbols on the instrument panel display and control lamps.

in Warning symbols on page 117.

The speed reduction by the ACC to maintain the distance from the vehi- cle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.

The ACC is not currently available.a)

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually for dirt, ice or knocks. If it is still unavailable, refer to a special- ised workshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed remains constant.

3

4

5

211

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac- tive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

It lights up green:

The ACC is active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Warning symbols on page 117.

Note

When the ACC is connected, the indications on the instrument panel screen may be con- cealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 195 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- er to determine the traffic situation Fig. 195 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. The instrument panel displays the following message: ACC: No sensor vision! If necessary clean the radar sensor .

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the ACC will automatically be available again. The message on the instru- ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex- ample, in a closed car park or due to the

presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen- sor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect ACC operation.

If structural modifications are made to the ve- hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- ered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC op- eration may be affected. So structural modifi- cations should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

If work is done incorrectly on the front of the vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged or lose its settings, and ACC operation may be affected. So repair work should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- connect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

The sensor may become damaged or lose its settings when knocked, for example, dur- ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.

212

Driver assistance systems

Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.

Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC

Fig. 196 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.

Fig. 197 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is connected, the green control lamp will light up on the instrument panel, and the programmed speed and ACC status will be displayed Fig. 194.

What ACC settings are possible?

Setting your speed.

Setting your distance

Connecting and activating the ACC.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC.

Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey.

Adjusting the driving profile.

Conditions in which the ACC does not react.

Setting speed

To set your speed, move the third lever loca- ted in position 1 upwards or downwards un- til the desired speed is shown on the instru- ment panel display. The speed adjustment is made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set the current speed as the vehicles cruise speed and activate the ACC, press the button Fig. 197. If you wish to increase or reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position 2 or press the Fig. 196 button .

The set speed can be changed when the ve- hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like. Any modification to the programmed speed will be shown on the bottom left part of the instrument panel display Fig. 194.

Setting your distance level

To increase/reduce the distance level, press the rocker switch towards the left/right Fig. 197 A .

The instrument panel display shows the mod- ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis- tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- mends level 3. The set distance can be changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur- ing driving, as you like .

213

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Connecting and activating the ACC

To connect and activate the ACC, the position of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle speed and the position of the third level of the ACC must all be taken into account.

With a manual gearbox, the gearbox selec- tor lever must be in any gear except first, and speed must be greater than approximately 30 km/h. With an automatic gearbox, the gear- box selector lever must be in position D or S.

To activate the ACC, press the button or move the third lever of the ACC to position 2

Fig. 196. At this point, the image of the ACC on the instrument panel display will switch from Inactive (Standby) to Active mode Fig. 194.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicle travels at a set speed and distance from the vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can be changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the 0 position Fig. 196 (engaged). An ACC deactivated message appears and the function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just to switch it temporarily to inactive mode (Standby), move the third lever to position 3

Fig. 196 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey.

In wet road conditions, you should always set a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in front than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

Very short

Short

Media

Long

Very long

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust the distance level that will be applied when the ACC is connected using the button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function buttons page 33.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACCs acceleration and braking behaviour page 225.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- haviour of the ACC can also be affected by se- lecting any of the following drive profiles in the Easy Connect system:

Normal

Sport

Eco

Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set- tings using the button and the SETTINGS > Driver assistance > ACC function buttons

page 33.

The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react:

If the accelerator is pressed.

If there is no gear engaged.

If the ESC is controlling.

If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged.

If the vehicle is reversing.

Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph).

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when the minimum distance to the vehicle in front is exceeded and the speed difference between both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc- tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case the brake pedal should be applied immedi- ately.

214

Driver assistance systems

The ACC may not be able to detect all situa- tions properly.

Stepping on the accelerator may cause the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver braking will have priority over intervention by the speed control or adaptive cruise control.

Always be ready to use the brakes!

Observe country-specific provisions gov- erning obligatory minimum distances be- tween vehicles.

It is dangerous to activate control and re- sume the programmed speed if the road, traf- fic or weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of accident!

Note

The programmed speed is erased once the ignition or the ACC are switched off.

When the traction control system (ASR) is deactivated during acceleration or else the ESC is activated in Sport* Mode ( page 118), the ACC switches off automati- cally.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the engine switches off automatically during the ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical- ly to begin driving.

Driver messages

ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar- antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa- ble. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver if the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt. Clean the sensor.

ACC: currently not available. Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee- ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.

ACC: only available in D, S or M

Select the D/S or M position on the selector lever.

ACC: parking brake applied

The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is applied. The ACC is available once again after the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. Intervention of stability control

The message for the driver is displayed when the electronic stability control (ESC) inter- venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically switched off.

ACC: Take action!

The message for the driver is displayed if, when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al- though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding with another vehicle.

ACC: speed limit

The message for the driver is displayed if, in vehicles with manual gearbox, the current speed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least 30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2nd gear

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear (manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speed

The message for the driver is displayed if, when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv- er does not shift up or down a gear in time,

215

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

which means exceeding or not reaching the permissible engine speed. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch pressed

Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the clutch pedal for longer abandons control mode.

Door open

Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle station- ary and the door open.

Function for preventing overtaking in an inside lane

Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display: ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func- tion that helps avoid overtaking while driving in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at a slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed on the multifunction display Fig. 198.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside lane the system will gently brake, and in ac- cordance with the speed will prevent the car from overtaking. The driver can override this function at any time by pressing the accelera- tor pedal. At low speeds the function is inac- tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in city traffic.

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con- trol ACC temporarily in certain situa- tions

In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated due to the system's limitations :

When changing lanes, on tight bends and roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera- tion lanes on motorways or in sections with road works to prevent involuntary accelera- tion to reach the programmed speed.

When going through a tunnel, as operation could be affected.

On roads with several lanes, when other ve- hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-

ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be overtaken on the right.

In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the vehicle in front might not be detected proper- ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be detected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- tions described, serious accidents and inju- ries may occur.

Always switch off the ACC in critical situa- tions.

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore- mentioned situations, you may commit a le- gal offence.

216

Driver assistance systems

Special driving situations

Fig. 199 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 200 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One vehicle turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain physical limitations inherent in the system. For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unexpected or come late from the driver's point of view. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessa- ry.

For example, the following traffic situations call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase (only vehicles with automatic gearbox)

After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin driving automatically when the vehicle in front drives off .

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. traffic jam), the instrument panel display shows the ACC ready to start message. If the ve- hicle ahead drives off again, the ACC will also do so automatically.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again, the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the ACC ready to start status by operating the third lever repeatedly towards position

2 Fig. 196 or by pressing the brake pedal. If the Press the brake message is shown on the instrument panel, press the brake. If you do not, an acoustic warning will be heard and the ACC will switch to inactive mode (Standby). At this point, the vehicle may be- gin to move towards the stopped vehicle ahead .

Overtaking

When the turn signal lights up before the ve- hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever backwards page 213.

217

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen- sor may no longer determine the vehicle in front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane Fig. 199 A. In these situations the vehicle may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re- act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to intervene by accelerating or in- terrupting the braking process by applying the brake or pushing the third lever back- wards page 213.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen- sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow or misaligned vehicles when they are within range Fig. 199 B. This applies particularly to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accessories

Special loads and accessories of other vehi- cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- cles with special loads and accessories or when overtaking them. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distance away from your own can only be detected when they are within range of the sensors. Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- act Fig. 200 C. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objects while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to it Fig. 200 D. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction and vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles approach- ing from the opposite direction or vehicles crossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works, can confuse the radar sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar sensor operates

If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel dis- play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor.

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the ACC will automatically be available again. The message on the instru- ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed car park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controls less dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example after abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated once brake temperature has cooled suffi- ciently. The message will disappear from the instrument panel display. If the message ACC not available remains on for quite a long

218

Driver assistance systems

time it means that there is a fault. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis- iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If you do not heed the Press the brake message, the vehicle may initiate an involun- tary movement and could crash into the vehi- cle ahead. In any event, before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect obstacles on the road. This could cause an accident and serious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

219

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA)*

Introduction

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect the traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps the driver when backing out of a parallel parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developed for driving on paved roads.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- tance (RCTA) included cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Acci- dents and severe injury may occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negligently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time.

Pay attention to the control lamps that may come on in the external rear view mirrors and

on the instrument panel, and follow any in- structions they may give.

The blind spot assistant could react to any special constructions that might be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irreg- ular dividers. This may cause erroneous warn- ings.

Never use the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert has been designed for use on paved roads.

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings.

Never use the blind spot detector or the parking assistant if the radar sensors are dirty.

The external rear view mirror control lamps may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.

CAUTION

The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- sion, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav- ing its functionality diminished.

In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it.

The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot

detector's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used.

Note

If the blind spot detector with parking assis- tant does not work as described in this chap- ter, do not use it and contact a specialised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

Lights up

Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa- ted and ready to operate.

Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the direction of the detected vehicle .

Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

If there are no indications from the control lamp in the external rear view mirror, this

220

Driver assistance systems

means that the blind spot detector has not detected any other vehicles in the area .

If the dipped beam is on, then the control lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode).

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- dents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es.

Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- sponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 201 In the exterior mirrors: indication of the blind spot detector.

Fig. 202 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen- sor zones.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle Fig. 202. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The blind spot de- tector will not work at speeds of less than ap- prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti- cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to notify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors

The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror Fig. 201 regarding the traffic situa- tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex- ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

221

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or windows with tinted film, the indications of the external mirrors may not be seen clearly or correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside Fig. 202. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- hicle Fig. 203, Fig. 204. The range to the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect stationary objects such as dividers, and thus give an in- correct indication.

222

Driver assistance systems

Driving situations

Fig. 203 Schematic diagram: Passing sit- uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi- cation from the blind spot detector in the left- hand external mirror.

Fig. 204 Schematic diagram: Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane. Indication from the blind spot detec- tor in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the external mirror Fig. 203 (arrow) or Fig. 204 (arrow):

When being overtaken by another vehicle Fig. 203 .

When overtaking another vehicle Fig. 204 with a speed differential of ap- prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is pass-

ing at a considerably higher speed, no indi- cation will be displayed.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the external mirror, because the blind spot detector takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the blind spot detector may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ly. E.g. in the following situations:

on tight bends;

in the case of lanes with different widths;

at the top of slopes;

in adverse weather conditions;

223

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- viders.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 205 Schematic representation of the rear cross traffic alert: zone monitored around the vehicle exiting the parking space.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper Fig. 202 to monitor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- cle Fig. 205, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, if the vehi- cle is equipped with the park assist system, the driver is also informed by means of a vis- ual signal on the radio screen. This signal is displayed in the form of a red strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the radio screen. This strip displays the side of the ve- hicle towards which traffic is approaching.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does not step on the brake, the system will engage the brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The system will brake automatically if the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap- proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it has detected that the vehicle has stopped, the system will keep the vehicle stopped for ap- prox. 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam- age, the system will not be able to automati- cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

The system should never be used in limited visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes.

Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians.

The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)

The blind spot detector with parking assis- tant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistance systems menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a multifunction camera, it can also be ac- cessed by means of the driver assistance sys- tems key located on the main beam head- light lever.

224

Driver assistance systems

Open the Assistants menu.

Blind spot

Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel is checked , the functionality will be automat- ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op- erate, the indications in the external mirrors will turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automatically deactivated, it will only be possible to restart the system after turning the vehicle off and restarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de- tector (BSD)

The radar sensors of the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- cally deactivated when, among other rea- sons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display.

Trailer mode

The Blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message will appear on the instrument panel display indicating that the blind spot detec- tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti- vated. Once the trailer has been unhitched from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to reactivate them in the corre- sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, then the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction

SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between four profiles or modes, Nor- mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that modify the behaviour of various vehicle func- tions, providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configured according to personal preferences. The other profiles are fixed.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions:

Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the en- gine responds more spontaneously or more in harmony with the movements of the accel- erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selec- ted, the Start-stop function is automatically activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change points are modified to position them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. Additionally, the Eco mode activates the In- ertia function, enabling consumption to be further reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau- ses the gear change recommendation indica- tions that appear on the instrument panel to vary, facilitating more efficient driving.

Dual Ride suspension

The Dual Ride suspension features a com- fortable suspension in the Eco and Normal

225

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

profiles, suitable for daily use. Contrasting with this it features a sporty suspension in the Sport profile, suitable for a sporty driv- ing style. In the Individual profile the sus- pension can be switched between Normal or Sport, depending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the Dual Ride sus- pension, the following message is displayed on the instrument panel screen Fault: damping setting.

Address

Power steering becomes more robust in Sport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

According to the active driving profile, the ac- celeration gradient of the adaptive cruise control varies.

Setting driving mode

Fig. 206 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but- ton.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco and Individual.

You can select the required mode either by repeatedly pressing the button MODE Fig. 206, or on the touch screen, in the menu that opens when the above button is pressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system display informs about the active mode.

The MODE button light remains lit up yellow when the active mode is different to Normal.

Driving pro- file

Characteristics

Normal Offers a balanced driving experience, suitable for everyday use.

Driving pro- file

Characteristics

Sport Provides a complete dynamic perform- ance in the vehicle, enabling the user a more sporty driving style.

Eco Places the vehicle in a particularly low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is respect- ful to the environment.

Individual

Enables some configurations to be modified by pressing the Profile settings button. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equip- ment fitted in the vehicle.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten- tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident.

Note

When the vehicle is switched off it will al- ways store the driving profile that was selec- ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev- ertheless, when the engine is restarted, the engine and the gear will not restart in the set- ting selected. For engine and gear to revert to the desired position, select the correspond- ing drive profile again or press the Easy Con- nect system button repeatedly.

226

Driver assistance systems

Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic conditions.

The eco mode is not available when towing a trailer.

Kick-down

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration to be reached.

If the eco* page 226 mode has been se- lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler- ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en- gine power is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Fatigue detection (break rec- ommendation)*

Related video

Fig. 207 Safety

Introduction

The Fatigue detection informs the driver when their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi- cient in length when making long journeys.

The driver always assumes the responsibil- ity of driving to their full capacity.

Never drive if you are tired.

The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in- formation in the section page 228, System limitations.

In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- vre as driver tiredness.

No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep!

Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note

Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only.

If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Function and operation

Fig. 208 On the instrument panel display: fa- tigue detection symbol.

Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey,

227

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

making a calculation of tiredness. This is constantly compared with the current driving behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- er is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display Fig. 208. The message on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- pending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multi function steering wheel page 35.

The message can be recalled to the instru- ment panel display using the multifunction display page 35.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- vated in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETTINGS function button

page 118. A mark indicates that the ad- justment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitations inherent to the system. The following condi- tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- vent it from functioning.

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

When cornering

On roads in poor condition

In unfavourable weather conditions

When a sporty driving style is employed

In the event of a serious distraction to the driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe- riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the system automatically re-establishes the tired- ness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted.

Park Assist*

Introduction

The Park Assist system is an additional func- tion of ParkPilot page 236 and helps the driver to:

find a suitable parking space,

select a parking mode,

park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- dicular and parallel spaces,

park driving forwards in suitable perpen- dicular spaces,

exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- tory radio the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver .

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into the Park Assist system cannot overcome the lim- its imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provided by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that

228

Driver assistance systems

may compromise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.

Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.

Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- rectly, these objects or people wearing such clothes.

Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circum- stances this may prevent them from detect- ing people or objects.

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not regis- tered.

Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain ob- jects in all situations.

WARNING

Quick turns of the steering wheel when park- ing or exiting a parking space with Park As- sist can cause serious injury.

Do not hold the steering wheel during ma- noeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disables the system during the manoeuvre, resulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trailer tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle.

Retrofitting of certain accessories to the ve- hicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage.

The Park Assist system uses as a reference parked vehicles, curbs and other objects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessary, oppor- tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.

The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- sion, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space.

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and al- ways from a distance of more than 10 cm.

A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the regis- tration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause:

false detections,

loss of sensor visibility.

cancellation of the parking manoeuvre or defective parking.

If one of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged, the area corresponding to that group of sen- sors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is corrected. How- ever, you can still use the sensors of the oth- er bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a specialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note

In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects.

Certain sources of noise, such as rough as- phalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings.

In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

229

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Description of the Park Assist system

Fig. 209 In the centre console: button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the Fig. 209 button to switch the system on and off and the mes- sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically inter- rupting the manoeuvres for parking or exit- ing a parking space

Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:

Button is pressed.

The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 mph).

The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre does not end with- in approximately 6 minutes following activa- tion of the automatic steering.

There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable).

ASR is switched off.

ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.

The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that button is pressed again.

Special Characteristics

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to change between forward and reverse gears. If this signal does not sound, the gear change

will be indicated when the continuous signal sounds (object at 30 cm) in ParkPilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- strument panel also displays the symbol . Press down the brake pedal so that the turn takes place with the vehicle stationary and the smallest possible number of manoeuvres take place in the parking space.

Trailer mode

The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket page 245 is electrically connected to a trailer.

After changing a wheel

If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correctly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slowly, at less than 20 km/h (12 mph) may contribute to this adaptation process in Introduc- tion on page 228.

230

Driver assistance systems

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 210 Overview of reduced displays for park- ing modes: Parallel parking in reverse. Per- pendicular parking in reverse. Perpendicular parking forwards.

Fig. 211 On the instrument panel display: displaying the Park Assist system with re- duced display.

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist with prior step in front of the space

After activating the Park Assist system and after detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- play Fig. 211. The reduced display of other possible parking modes is also shown Fig. 210. If the mode selected by the sys- tem does not correspond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by press- ing button Fig. 209.

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 233.

2.

Press button .

A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- lected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display and the reduced display shows an- other parking mode it can be changed to.

Action

3.

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side correspond- ing to the road. By default, if the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direction of traffic.

4.

If necessary, press the button again to change parking mode.

Once you have switched to all possible parking modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off.

5. Press the button again to switch the system back on.

6. Follow the instructions displayed on the instru- ment panel while paying attention to traffic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.

231

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 233.

2. Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle.

Action

3.

Press the button once.

A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- lected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display without reduced display.

4. Release the steering wheel in Introduction on page 229.

232

Driver assistance systems

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 212 On the instrument panel display: paral- lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park- ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 213 On the instrument panel display: per- pendicular parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 212 and Fig. 213:

Message to move forwards

Your vehicle

Parked vehicle

Parking space detected

Message to park

Message to press the brake pedal

Progress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Progress bars

The progress bar Fig. 212 7 and Fig. 213 7 on the screen of the instrument panel displays the relative distance to be covered. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress bar. When driving forward, the content of the pro- gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As- sist

For parallel parking spaces

For perpendicular parking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 179.

233

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

For parallel parking spaces

For perpendicular parking spaces

Do not exceed approxi- mately 40 km/h (25 mph)

when driving past the parking space.

Do not exceed approxi- mately 20 km/h (12 mph)

when driving past the parking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driv- ing past the parking space.

Length of the space: length of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Width of the space: width of the vehicle + 0.8 me-

tres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.

Parking

Do the following:

1. The necessary conditions have to be met to park with Park Assist page 233 and the parking mode must be selected page 231.

2.

Look at the display on the instrument panel to see if the space has been detected as appropri- ate and if the correct position for parking has been reached Fig. 212 or Fig. 213 .

The space is considered appropriate if the dis- play on the instrument panel shows the message to park 5 .

3. Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage the reverse gear.

4. Release the steering wheel in Introduction on page 229.

Do the following:

5.

Please note the following message: Active au- tomatic steering. Watch out around you. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa- ry, change gears and brake.

6.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays the message to go forwards Fig. 212 1

or Fig. 213 1 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays the message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to cover page 233.

7.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel.

OR: until the symbol on the instrument panel display switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel display shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the space Fig. 212 or Fig. 213 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each manoeu- vre until the Park Assist system has finished turn- ing the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a correspond- ing message is displayed on the instrument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Note

If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.

234

Driver assistance systems

Exiting a parking space with Park As- sist (only for parallel spaces)

Fig. 214 On the instrument panel display: ex- iting a parallel parking space.

Key to the Fig. 214:

Parked vehicle

Your vehicle in reverse gear

Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover

Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist

Only for parallel parking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 179.

Length of the space: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres

1

2

3

4

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking space

Do the following:

For parallel parking spaces

1. The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met page 235.

2. Switch on the engine page 168.

3.

Press the button Fig. 209.

A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on.

4. Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space.

5. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.

6.

Release the steering wheel in Introduction on page 229.

Please note the following message: Active automatic steering. Watch out around you. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa- ry, change gears and brake.

For parallel parking spaces

7.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel display shows the message to go forward.

The progress bar Fig. 214 3 indicates the dis- tance to cover page 233.

8.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the sym- bol on the instrument panel display switches off.

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel display shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it can exit the space.

10.

The vehicle can exit the space when a corre- sponding message is displayed on the instru- ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic sig- nal sounds.

Take charge of the steering with the turning an- gle set by the Park Assist system.

11. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking space.

235

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Automatic braking intervention by Park Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically braking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking in time .

Automatic braking intervention to avoid ex- ceeding the speed limit

To avoid exceeding the speed limit of approx- imately 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may acti- vate automatically. After automatically acti- vating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- ing space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

Depending on certain conditions, the Park Assist system can automatically brake the ve- hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- tioning and holding down the brake ped- al . Following this the driver must press the brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reduce damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- ishing.

WARNING

The automatic braking intervention by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking interven- tion may only work in a limited way or not work at all.

Always be ready to use the brakes yourself!

The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. Following this, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid

General information

Assorted assistance systems which vary depending on the equipment fitted in the car will help you when parking or manoeu- vring.

The rear parking aid is an audible assistant that warns about obstacles located behind the vehicle page 237.

During parking, Parking System Plus assists the driver by visually and audibly warning them about obstacles detected in front and behind the vehicle page 238.

WARNING

Always pay attention, also when looking straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- roundings. The assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. When in- serting or removing the vehicle from a park- ing space, or when performing similar ma- noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- sponsibility.

Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not regis- tered. Pay special attention to children and animals.

Always keep visual control of the vehicle surroundings: use the mirrors for additional help.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- fected by different factors that may lead to damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- rounds:

Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects:

Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, fences, posts and thin trees.

Objects that are located above the sen- sors, such as protrusions in a wall.

236

Driver assistance systems

Objects with certain surfaces or struc- tures, such as wire mesh fences or powder snow.

Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- rectly, these objects or people wearing such clothes.

Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circum- stances this may prevent them from detect- ing people or objects.

Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the bottom of the vehicle are not detected either.

If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig- nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable damage.

The knocks or damage on the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- body can adjust the orientation of the sen- sors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop.

Note

In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area, e.g:

with rough or cobbled floors or ground with long grass;

with external ultrasound sources, such as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;

In downpours, intense snow or dense ex- haust gases;

or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the regis- tration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause:

false detections,

loss of sensor visibility,

In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects.

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply it directly only very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm.

Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Parking Aid.

In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- tem, it is advised that you practice parking in an area or car park that is free from traffic. There must be good weather and light condi- tions.

The volume and tone of the warnings can be modified, in addition to the indications page 240.

In vehicles without a driver information system, these parameters can be modified in a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised workshop.

Please observe information on towing a trailer page 241.

The display on the Easy Connect screen shows a slight time delay.

Rear parking aid*

The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in parking by means of audible warning sounds.

Description

There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta- cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- tion. Cleaning instructions page 259.

The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:

side area 0.60 m

central area 1.60 m

237

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- val between the audible warnings will be re- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: Do not continue to move forward (or backward) in General information on page 236, in General in- formation on page 236 !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning).

Activating/Deactivating

When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid is automatically switched on. This is con- firmed with a short warning.

On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid system is disconnected immediately.

Parking system plus*

Fig. 215 Represented area.

Parking system plus assists you audibly and visually when parking.

There are sensors integrated in the front and rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visu- ally on the Easy Connect system.

In the event of danger of a frontal collision, the audible warnings come from the front of the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of a rear-end collision they come from the rear.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- tion. Cleaning instructions page 259.

The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

1.20 mA

0.60 m

1.60 m

0.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- val between the audible warnings will be re- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: do not continue to move forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning).

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 216 Centre console: parking aid button.

Manual connection of Parking Aid

Press the button once. The symbol on the button will light up yellow.

B

C

D

238

Driver assistance systems

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid

Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display (the audible sounds remain active)

Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system.

OR: press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.

OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that is in its forwards path at a speed below 10 km/h (6 mph) page 239, Automatic ac- tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis- tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con- nection is activated in the infotainment sys- tem. A reduced display is shown.

OR: the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

Move the selector lever to position P.

OR: accelerate to more than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) forward.

Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid

Press the function button found on the steering wheel.

Change from reduced view to full view

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.

OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image (Rear View Camera RVC)

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.

OR: Press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up yellow when the system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 217 Miniature indication of automatic ac- tivation.

When the Parking System Plus is switched on automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will

be displayed and the segments will be shown on the left side of the screen Fig. 217.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- proaching an obstacle located in front of the vehicle. It only operates every time the speed is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carried out in order for it to automatically switch on:

Switch off the ignition and switch it on again.

OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- fore reducing speed below this number again.

OR: place the selector lever in position P and then move it from this position.

OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aid miniature indication can be switched on and off from the Easy Connect system menu page 33:

Switch the ignition on.

Select: button > Settings > Parking and manoeuvring.

Select the Automatic activation op- tion. When the function button check box is activated , the function is on.

239

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

If the system has been activated automatical- ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv- en when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circum- stances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 218 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstacle can be estimated using the segments around the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

a white segment is dis- played when the obstacle is not within the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of travel is in the opposite direction to its location, and it is more than 30 cm from the vehicle.

obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow.

obstacles that are less than 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- played in red.

Moreover, with the SEAT Media System Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- cates the vehicle's expected journey based on the steering wheel angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- stacles are represented in red, including those out of the path. Do not continue to move forward (or backward) in General information on page 236, in General in- formation on page 236 !

White segments:

Yellow segments:

Red segments:

Adjusting the display and audible warnings

The settings for the display and audible warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- nect*.

Automatic activation

on activates the Automatic activa- tion option page 239.

off deactivates the Automatic ac- tivation option page 239.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front area.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the active audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting.

240

Driver assistance systems

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- ing aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, next time that parking aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi- cated.

Parking System Plus*

If there is a fault in the parking aid system a message will appear on the instrument panel indicating the error. In addition the key LED will blink.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the Easy Connect display in front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and B are displayed Fig. 215. If a front sensor

is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C

and D are displayed.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear

sensors will not be activated when reverse gear is engaged, when the selector lever is turned to position R or when the button is pressed.

Parking System Plus

The distance to possible obstacles at the rear of the vehicle will not be displayed on the screen and nor will it be indicated by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- play objects detected at the front, and the ve- hicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braking while manoeuvring function* 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used to minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when it detects an obstacle in the vehicles path that could cause a collision, driving forwards or in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is activated automatically. For the system to operate, manoeuvring speed must be greater than 2.5 km/h and less than 10 km/h.

Following an intervention, the braking while manoeuvring function will be inactive in the

same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once the gear is changed, or the selector levers position is changed, the function will be ac- tive again. The Parking Aids limitations ap- ply.

The braking while manoeuvring function is controlled in the Easy Connect system with the menu and the SETTINGS and Park and manoeuvre function buttons.

on permits the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

off does not permit the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency brak- ing

When the function is deactivated with the Braking while manoeuvring button that appears

on the Parking System screen of the Easy Connect system.

Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or bonnet are opened.

241

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Rear Assist Rear View Cam- era*

Related video

Fig. 219 Safety

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING

The Rear Assist does not make it possible to precisely calculate the distance from ob- stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it overcome the system's own limits, hence us- ing it may cause serious accidents and inju- ries if used negligently or without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her sur- roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.

The camera lens expands and distorts the field of vision and displays the objects on the screen in a different, vague manner. The per- ception of distances is also distorted by this effect.

Due to the screen resolution or insufficient light conditions, some items may be dis- played in an unsatisfactory manner or not at

all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be displayed on screen and could damage the vehicle.

The rear assist has blind spots where it is not possible to represent people or objects (small children, animals and certain objects cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon- itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times.

Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and snow, and do not cover it.

The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Supervise the parking operation at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround- ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen.

The images on the rear assist screen are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, protruding parts or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all.

Vehicle load modifies the representation of the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes with ve- hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi- cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve- hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying a heavy load.

In the following situations, the objects or other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- tem display appear to be further away or

closer than they really are: Pay special atten- tion:

On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.

On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

When the vehicle approaches objects that are not on the ground surface or are jutting out from it. These objects may al- so be outside the camera's angle of vi- sion when reversing.

Note

It is important to take great care and pay special attention if you are not yet familiar with the system.

Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- cle's rear lid is open.

242

Driver assistance systems

Instructions for use

Fig. 220 On the rear lid handle: location of the rear assist camera.

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver during reverse parking or manoeuvring Fig. 220. The camera image is viewed to- gether with orientation lines projected by the system on the Infotainment system screen. The bottom of the screen displays part of the bumper, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settings

Rear assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings.

To change these settings:

Park the vehicle in a safe place.

Apply the parking brake.

Switch the ignition on.

If necessary, switch on the Infotainment system.

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.

Press the function button displayed on the right of the image.

Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by moving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma- noeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow- ing cases:

If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty lens.

If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- played very clearly or is incomplete.

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

If the position and installation angle of the camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ommends practising parking and manoeu- vring with the rear assist in a place without

too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice:

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- based glass cleaning product and clean the lens with a dry cloth.

Remove snow using a small brush.

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens.

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could damage the camera.

243

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Parking and manoeuvring with the rear assist

Fig. 221 Display on the Infotainment system screen: orientation lines.

Switching the system on and off

The rear assist will switch on when the igni- tion is on or the engine running, on engaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- matic gearbox).

The system switches off 8 seconds after disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) or removing the selector lever from the R po- sition (automatic gearbox). The system will also disconnect immediately after the igni- tion is switched off.

The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus page 236, the camera image will cease to be transmitted immediately when reverse gear is disengaged or when the selector lever is moved from the R position, and the optical information provided by the Parking Aid sys- tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rear assist image can also be concealed:

By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display.

OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that appears on the left of the screen (which switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist image again:

Disengage reverse, or change the selector lever's position, engage reverse again or move the selector lever to position R.

OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Meaning of the orientation lines

Fig. 221

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the approximate width of the vehicle plus the rear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked in green ends approximately 2 m behind the vehicle on the road surface.

Intermediate line: indicates a distance of approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road surface.

Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis- tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

Place the vehicle in front of the parking space and engage reverse gear (manual gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- tion (automatic gearbox).

Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side orientation lines lead to- wards the parking space.

Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side orientation lines run parallel to it.

1

2

3

4

1) WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

244

Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device*

Introduction

The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi- cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac- cessory, meets all the national technical and legal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip- ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the corresponding adaptor, which is available as a genuine SEAT accessory.

The maximum authorised towing load is 48 kg.

WARNING

Before each journey, make sure that the de- tachable ball joint is properly fitted and se- cured in its housing.

If the detachable ball joint is not properly fitted and secured, do not use it.

Do not use the towing bracket device for towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.

Do not modify or adapt the towing device connection.

Never unhook the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched.

CAUTION

Handle the detachable ball joint with care in order to avoid damaging the bumper paint- work.

Note

Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball joint page 98.

Description

Fig. 222 Towing bracket device support / de- tachable ball joint / key.

Depending on the country or version, the towing bracket device's detachable ball joint is located:

underneath the floor panel of the luggage compartment.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

The towing device bracket is supplied with a key.

Key to Fig. 222

13-pin connector

Safety lug

Hook housing

Hook housing cap

Ball protective cover

Detachable ball

Locking lever

Lock cover

Release bolt

Lock

Locking balls

Key

Note

Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you lose your key.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

245

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Placing in standby position

Fig. 223 Step 1.

Fig. 224 Step 2.

Before assembling it, place the detachable ball in the standby position with the follow- ing two steps.

Step 1.

Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un- til the part of the key with the holes reaches the top position Fig. 223.

Step 2.

Grip the detachable ball below the protec- tive cover.

Press the release bolt B in the direction of arrow 2 , and at the same time press lever

C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go Fig. 224.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Standby position

Fig. 225 Standby position: Position of the lev- er and the release bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly

Key A Fig. 225 is in the released posi- tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac- ing upwards).

Lever B Fig. 225 is in the bottom posi- tion.

The release bolt C Fig. 225 can be moved.

246

Towing bracket device

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready for installation.

CAUTION

The key cannot be removed or turned in the standby position.

Assembling the detachable ball - Step 1

Fig. 226 Fitting the detachable ball / Release bolt in the deployed position.

Fitting the detachable ball

Remove the hook housing cap 4

Fig. 222 downwards.

Set the detachable ball to its standby posi- tion page 246.

Grip the detachable ball from below Fig. 226 and insert it into the hook hous-

ing following the direction of arrow 1 until it engages audibly .

Lever A turns automatically in the direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B

moves outwards (the red and green part will be visible) .

If lever A does not turn automatically or the release bolt B does not come out, the de- tachable ball should be removed by turning the lever as far as possible downwards from the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's support surfaces and the cavity should then be cleaned.

WARNING

When attaching the detachable ball, keep your hands well away from the reach of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers caught.

Never try to pull the lever upwards by force to turn the key. The detachable ball would not be secured properly!

Assembling the detachable ball - Step 2

Fig. 227 Locking the lock.

Fig. 228 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step page 247, As- sembling the detachable ball - Step 1!

Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 un- til the part of the key with the holes reaches the bottom position Fig. 227.

247

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Remove the key in the direction of arrow 2 .

Place cover B in the lock in the direction of arrow 3 Fig. 228 .

Check that the detachable ball is secure page 248.

CAUTION

After removing the key, always place the cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be- comes soiled it will be impossible to insert the key.

Keep the towing bracket device's housing cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre- vent the detachable ball from being properly secured!

If the detachable ball is removed, always place the cap on the hook's housing.

Checking proper attachment

Fig. 229 Detachable ball properly attached.

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball, make sure that it is properly attached first.

Detachable ball properly attached.

The detachable ball will not fall out of the housing cavity after a major knock or jerk.

Lever A Fig. 229 is fully raised.

The release bolt B Fig. 229 is sticking fully out (the red and green part is visible).

The key has been removed.

Cover C Fig. 229 is placed over the lock.

WARNING

When removing the detachable ball, keep your hands well away from the reach of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers caught.

The towing bracket device should only be used if the detachable ball has been properly locked!

Removing the detachable ball - Step 1

Fig. 230 Removing the lock cover.

Fig. 231 Releasing the lock.

Remove cover A from the lock in the direc- tion of arrow 1 Fig. 230.

248

Towing bracket device

Insert key B into the lock in the direction of arrow 2 Fig. 231.

Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un- til the part of the key with the holes is facing upwards.

WARNING

Never remove the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched.

Note

Before you remove the detachable ball, you are advised to place the protective cover on the ball coupling.

Removing the detachable ball - Step 2

Fig. 232 Releasing the detachable ball.

Do not omit this first step page 248, Re- moving the detachable ball - Step 1!

Releasing the detachable ball

Grip the detachable ball from below.

Press the release bolt A in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same time press lever B in the direction of arrow

2 as far as it will go.

In this position, the detachable ball is loose and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this does not occur when you release it, press it with the other hand from above.

The detachable ball locks into the standby position at the same time and is therefore ready to be reinserted into the hook housing .

Fit the cap 4 Fig. 222 onto its housing.

WARNING

Never leave the detachable ball loose in the luggage compartment. It could cause damage in the luggage compartment in the case of abrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen- ger safety!

CAUTION

If you hold the lever and do not press down on it as far as you can, after you remove the detachable ball, the latter will continue up- wards and will not lock into the standby posi- tion. The detachable ball should be placed in this position before the next assembly.

Keep the detachable ball in the standby po- sition, with the key inserted into the box while you place it facing downwards with the side opposite to the one where the key is in- serted. The key could get damaged!

When operating the lever, do not apply too much pressure (for example, do not stand on it)!

Note

Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be- fore you put it away with the vehicle tools.

Operation and care

Put the cover on the housing cavity so that dirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check the ball coupling and apply suitable grease if necessary.

Use the protective cover when putting the de- tachable ball away to keep the luggage com- partment clean.

Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur- faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

CAUTION

The top part of the hook housing is greased. Make sure that the grease has not been re- moved.

249

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

Trailer towing

What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equipment.

If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con- sult page 253.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. It is available at any Technical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- mum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the vehicle climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be re-

duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. When possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbar loads that are given on the data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these fig- ures for the towing bracket, are given in the vehicle documentation or in chapter Tech- nical Data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them moving.

Tyre pressure

The maximum permissible tyre pressure val- ues are shown on the sticker on the back of the right front door frame. Set the tyre pres- sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the standard rear vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.

Tow rope

Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 251.

Trailer rear lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations page 251.

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

Note

Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recommend additional services between the normal inspection inter- vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow- ing a trailer.

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your country.

250

Towing bracket device

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 233 Schematic diagram: assignment of the pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

Key of the Schematic diagram Fig. 233:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10

Key of the Schematic diagram Fig. 233:

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pin 9

Electrical socket for trailer

The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de- tects that a trailer has been connected elec- trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer will receive voltage through this connection.

Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 is only powered when the engine is running. The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam- ple, a caravan battery.

Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to each other to avoid discharging or damaging the vehicle's battery.

The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13, should never be connected to each other to avoid overloading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

Side lights (total) 100 Watts

Rear lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note

If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur- rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam- aged.

Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.

Ball coupling of towing bracket de- vice*

The ball coupling is provided with instruc- tions on fitting and removing the ball cou- pling of the towing bracket.

251

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehi- cle and causing injury.

Note

By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures the number plate.

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 234 Turn the 13-pin connector.

Before driving

Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig. 234.

Remove the protective cover 5 Fig. 222 upwards.

After driving

Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and insert it in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 234.

Fit the protective cover 5 Fig. 222 on the ball coupling.

Safety lug

The safety lug B Fig. 234 is used to hook up the trailer's retainer cable.

On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain- er cable should have slack in all the trailer positions with respect to the vehicle (sharp bends, reverse gear, etc.).

Headlights

The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the headlight range rotary adjuster1).

WARNING

Never use the safety lug to tow!

Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf- fic conditions.

All work on the electrical system must be carried out only by specialised workshops.

Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the rear lights or any other power sources.

After hooking up the trailer and connecting the socket, check that all the trailer's rear lights are working properly.

Note

If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting, check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse box page 58.

The contact between the retainer cable and the safety lug may give rise to mechanical wear in the lug's surface protection. This wear will not prevent the safety lug from op- erating properly or cause any fault and is ex- cluded from the warranty.

When connecting and disconnecting the trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake should be applied.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenon headlights.

252

Towing bracket device

Anti-theft alarm system

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered when the electrical connection be- tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system before connecting or disconnecting a trailer page 132.

Conditions for the integration of a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system.

The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an- ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket device.

The trailer is connected electrically to the towing vehicle by the trailer connector.

The electrical system of the vehicle and the trailer are prepared for operation.

The vehicle is locked with the ignition key and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTION

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear LED lights are not integrated in the anti-theft alarm system.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex- tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re- duced with increasing speed. For this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies es- pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak- ing. Never try to stop the snaking by in- creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by locking of trail- er wheels. Select a low gear in due course before going down a steep downhill. This en- ables you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and during pro- longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high engine speed, always monitor the coolant temperature gauge page 116.

Electronic stability control*

The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.

Retrofitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 235 Attachment points for towing brack- et.

253

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Operation

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- hicle is purchased, this must be completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket A are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi- mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

B 65 mm (minimum)

C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

D 1,033 mm

E 322 mm

F 338 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a towing bracket, please contact a Technical Service to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- rate control lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow- er socket must be connected to the vehicle electrical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.

Figures in the illustration show the eleva- tion value and the attachment points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe- cialised workshop.

If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal- led, there is a serious danger of accident.

For your own safety, please observe the tow bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION

If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to the vehicle elec- trical system.

Note

SEAT recommends that the towing hooks be fitted at a specialised workshop. Consult your SEAT dealer in case additional modifica- tions to your vehicle are necessary.

Due to the specific design of the exhaust, the fitting of a conventional towing hook is

not recommended for some sportier versions. Please consult your Technical Service.

254

Care and maintenance

Advice

Care and maintenance

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical changes to your vehicle, we recommend that you consult your Technical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information about the use, legal requirements and recommenda- tions from the manufacturer regarding acces- sories and spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and professionally in- stalled.

Despite a continuous observation of the mar- ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if these parts have been ap- proved by an official testing agency or are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct impact on the driver's control of the vehicle, such as a cruise control system or electroni- cally-controlled suspension, must be ap- proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's au- thorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle it- self, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of in- jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

Modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac- cording to our specifications. Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause malfunc- tions. Due to the way the electronic compo- nents are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and also invalidate your vehicle registration docu- ments.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work incorrectly performed. For this reason, we recommend having all work per- formed by a SEAT Technical Service using SEAT Original Spare Parts.

WARNING

Any type of work or modification performed incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal- functions and can cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office equip- ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT generally authorises in-vehicle installations

255

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

of approved types of radio transmitters provi- ded that:

The aerial is installed correctly.

The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth- er with non-reflective aerial trimming).

The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electron- ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:

No external aerial.

External aerial incorrectly installed.

Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- nal aerial .

Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ded the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a prop- erly installed external aerial can create exces- sive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note

The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances.

Please use the mobile telephone/radio op- erating instructions.

Care and cleaning

General notes

Vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging war- ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro- sion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the environment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer substances such as in- sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials re- main on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for instance in strong sunlight, further intensify the corrosive effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car-care products are available in your Tech- nical Services. Keep the product instructions until you have used them up.

256

Care and maintenance

WARNING

Car-care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car-care products. Improper use could cause health problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours; they should be used in well ventila- ted areas.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explosion.

Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the ignition.

CAUTION

Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the paintwork or the win- dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of water.

For the sake of the environment

When purchasing car care products, try to select ones that are not harmful to the envi- ronment.

The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.

Care of the vehicle exterior

Automatic car wash tunnel

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tun- nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative prod- ucts.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such as closing the windows. There is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator first.

After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- dent.

Hand-washing

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa- ter.

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very light pressure.

Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.

Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.

Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, using a different sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.

Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha- mois leather.

In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals and their surfaces to prevent them from

257

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber seals.

After washing the vehicle

After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking sever- al times.

WARNING

Wash your vehicle with the ignition switch- ed off.

Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when cleaning the under- body, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of injury.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- dent.

CAUTION

Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehi- cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi- cle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment

To protect the environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially provided wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste water from entering the sewer system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the vehicle with a high pres- sure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner, particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying distance for soft ma- terials and painted bumpers.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re- move ice or snow from windows page 259.

Never use concentrated jet nozzles (rotat- ing jets) .

After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking sever- al times page 174.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac- cident.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- dent.

CAUTION

Do not use water hotter than +60C (+140F). This could damage the vehicle.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf- ficient distance from sensitive materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma- terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain- ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.

Factory-fitted adhesive sheets

The following indications should be taken in- to account to avoid damaging adhesive sheets:

Do not use high pressure cleaners.

258

Care and maintenance

Do not use scrapers to remove ice or snow from the sheets.

Do not polish the adhesive sheets.

Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.

It is preferable to wash them with a soft sponge and gentle neutral soap.

Sensors and camera lenses

Use a small brush to remove snow and a de-icer spray to remove ice.

Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- uct and a soft, dry cloth.

Moisten the camera lens using a standard alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth.

CAUTION

When you clean the vehicle with a pressure washer:

Stay a suitable distance from the sensors on the front and rear bumpers.

Do not clean the camera lenses or sur- rounding area with the pressure washer.

Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, as it could crack the lens.

Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the lens.

Vehicle paint maintenance

Regular waxing protects the paintwork.

You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water does not form small drops and run off the paintwork when it is clean.

Good quality hard wax products are available at your Technical Service.

Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental contaminants page 256. It is also effective in protecting against minor scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro- tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in your Technical Service.

The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax com- pounds to seal the paint page 259, Vehicle paint maintenance.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain- ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved solvent-free plas- tic cleaning and care products.

CAUTION

The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spil- led.

Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cleaning of windows and mirrors

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

259

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

Removing snow

Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois leathers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one direction only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos- its off.

Wax deposits can only be removed with a special cleaner available at your Technical Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add- ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits are not removed.

CAUTION

Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on the inside of the win- dow.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades improve visibility.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.

2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind- screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.

Care of rubber seals

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub- ber seals.

The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc. will remain pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable rubber care product from time to time (for example silicone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre- mature ageing and leaks. The doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinder

The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win- ter.

To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.

2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.

If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.

CAUTION

To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.

Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

260

Care and maintenance

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short clean- ing times, damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by brak- ing several times page 174, Braking ca- pacity and braking distance.

Alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.

Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.

Every 3 months

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre- serve their appearance. If road salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the rims. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the damaged area should be re- paired immediately.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Steel wheel rims on page 261.

Vehicle underbody protection

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend that you check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and retouch it if necessary, be- fore and after the winter season.

We recommend that you go to your Technical Service to carry out repair work and addition- al anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con- verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys- tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.

Cleaning engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat- ment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly im- portant in winter when the vehicle is fre- quently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en- gine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and after winter.

Technical Services have the proper products for cleaning and preservation as well as the necessary workshop equipment. For this rea- son, we recommend having this work per- formed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually re- moved if the engine compartment is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you

261

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

have the engine cleaned. On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and components in the engine com- partment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 267.

Before opening the bonnet, switch the en- gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al- ways remove the key from the ignition.

Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.

Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un- derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.

Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- ture-controlled and could start automatically, even when the key is removed from the igni- tion!

For the sake of the environment

Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed when the engine is washed. The polluted wa- ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason, engine washing should be car-

ried out only by a specialised workshop or a petrol station.

Caring for the vehicle interior

Radio display/Easy Connect* and con- trol panel*

The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth and a professionally available LCD cleaner. Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the cleaning fluid.

The Easy Connect control panel* should first be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes into the device or between the keys and housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth dampened with water and washing-up liquid.

CAUTION

To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipe the display with a dry cloth.

To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid goes into the Easy Connect control panel*.

Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash panel.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners containing sol- vents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause injuries.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cleaning wooden trim*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois- tened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap solution.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cleaning textile covers and trim parts

Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door trim) should be cleaned regularly with a

262

Care and maintenance

vacuum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt which could otherwise be rubbed into the textile material during use. Do not use steam cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt deeper into the textile material.

Normal cleaning

We recommend that you use a soft sponge or a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes on floor coverings and mats, as other textile surfaces could become damaged.

In the case of normal surface dirt you can use a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the foam on the textile surface and to work it into the material lightly. However, make sure that the textile material does not become soaking wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab- sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and vacuum off any residue once the surface is completely dry.

Cleaning stains

Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli- cate fabrics. This solution should be applied with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re- move, a washing paste can be applied direct- ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric. The surface will then have to be wiped with clear water to remove any residue left by the paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge

and then dab the stain with an absorbent cloth.

Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re- move the soap with water (wet sponge).

A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then dab the dissolved grease or colour particles off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You may also have to treat the stain once more using washing paste and water.

If the covers or textile trim panels are badly soiled we recommend that you have them cleaned by a professional cleaning company with a shampoo and spray.

Note

Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure they are closed.

Cleaning leather*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa- ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two

tablespoons diluted in one litre of water) and a cloth.

Do not let the water soak through the leath- er or soak into the seams.

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

Leather maintenance

The leather should be treated twice a year with a special leather-care product, availa- ble at Technical Services.

Apply these products very sparingly.

Then wipe off with a soft cloth.

SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides employed, the finished leath- er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in every- day use and when looking after the leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If the vehi- cle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal.

CAUTION

Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather.

263

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised workshop.

Cleaning Alcantara upholstery*

Removing dust and dirt

Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe down the seat covers.

Removing stains

Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di- luted white spirits.

Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and work inwards.

Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.

Do not use leather cleaning products on Al- cantara seat covers.

You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If the car is left standing in the sun for long periods, Al- cantara leather should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How- ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor- mal use.

CAUTION

Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod- ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised workshop.

On no account use brushes, hard sponges or similar utensils.

Seat belt cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

If large stains form on the belts, the automat- ic belt retractor will not work correctly.

WARNING

Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.

Check the condition of the seat belts at reg- ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web- bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialised workshop.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way.

CAUTION

After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com- pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.

264

Checking and refilling levels

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

Refuelling

Read the additional information carefully page 54

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is full. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient condi- tions are warm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- rious burns and other injuries.

Never smoke or come into contact with sparks when filling the fuel tank of the vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.

For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi- cle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and leak.

If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following:

Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic charge could build up during filling, caus- ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of met- al, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION

Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.

Never run the tank completely dry. Irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert- er and cause damage.

When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en- gine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine. Subsequently, when you start the engine it may take longer than normal to start firing

(up to one minute). This is due to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air be- fore starting.

For the sake of the environment

Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto- matic filler nozzle has switched off, this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces- sary, request assistance from specialised per- sonnel.

Fuel

Types of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- rol. The petrol must comply with European Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of 10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- ated by their octane rating (RON).

265

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

The following titles appear on the corre- sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 octanes

You should use super petrol with a minimum of 95 octanes.

If super is not available, in an emergency you may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.

Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super plus 98 octane petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

If super is not available, in an emergency you may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav- iour, power and service life of the engine. This is why the petrol you use should carry suitable additives already included by the petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- tives is not available or engine problems arise, the necessary additives must be added when refuelling .

Not all petrol additives have been shown to be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- ditives may cause significant damage to the engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- ditives should never be used. Metal additives may also be contained in petrol additives for improving anti-detonation ratings or octane ratings .

SEAT recommends genuine Volkswagen Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines. These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- ers, where information on how to use them can also be obtained.

CAUTION

Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Using them may damage the engine!

Never refuel with fuels containing a large proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). This could damage the fuel system.

Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or fuel containing other metal additives would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter.

Only use fuel additives that have been ap- proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- knock additives may contain metal additives that could seriously damage the engine or the catalytic converter. These additives must not be used.

High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

Note

You may use petrol with a high octane num- ber than the one recommended for your en- gine.

In those countries where unleaded petrol is not available, you may refuel with a fuel with a low lead content.

Diesel fuel

Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

266

Checking and refilling levels

We recommend the use of diesel fuel which complies to European standard EN 590. If diesel fuel which meets European standard EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- phur content of the fuel must be below 50 parts per million.

Winter-grade diesel

Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it is more difficult to start the engine. For this reason, petrol stations in some countries al- so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity when cold (winter-grade diesel).

CAUTION

The vehicle is not designed for the use of FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would be damaged if you used biodiesel.

Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called thinners, petrol or similar additives with diesel fuel.

If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- quently than is specified in the Maintenance Programme. We recommend having this done by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed to collect in the filter, this can cause engine performance problems.

Working in the engine compart- ment

safety notes for work in the engine compartment

Read the additional information carefully page 17

Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compartment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec- tor lever to position P.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet page 268.

You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work carried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool- ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, are under constant development. SEAT pro- vides a constant flow of information to Tech- nical Services concerning modifications. For this reason, we recommend you have service

fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni- cal Service. Please observe the relevant in- structions page 255. The engine compart- ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area .

WARNING

All work on the engine or in the engine com- partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and burns, acci- dents and even fire.

Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

Apply the handbrake and move the gear lever to neutral or selector lever to position P.

Keep children away from the vehicle.

Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.

Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.

Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri- cal system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 68. The battery could explode.

Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- ture controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!

267

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

Never cover the engine with additional in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire!

Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!

Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.

Always make sure you have not left any ob- jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the engine compartment.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci- dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se- curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following:

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit- ting clothes.

Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precau- tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical components, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings:

Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Do not smoke.

Never work near naked flames.

Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could suddenly open while driving leaving the driv- er without visibility. This could result in a se- rious accident.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured by the locking mecha- nism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body pan- els.

While driving, if you notice that the bonnet is not correctly closed then stop immediately and close it correctly.

Only open and close the bonnet when there is nobody within its range.

CAUTION

When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!

For the sake of the environment

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- ronment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci- alised workshop.

Opening the bonnet

Read the additional information carefully page 17

The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- cle.

Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in rest position.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment.

268

Checking and refilling levels

Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 267.

Closing the bonnet

Slightly lift the bonnet.

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.

At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci- dent.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se- cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

269

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

Checking levels

Fig. 236 Diagram for the location of the various ele- ments.

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Engine oil level dipstick

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery

Windscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components men-

1

2

3

4

5

6

tioned above. These operations are descri- bed in page 267.

Overview

You will find further explanations, instruc- tions and restrictions on the technical speci- fications as of page 285.

Note

The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should appear on the con- tainer of the service oil; when the container displays the specific standards for petrol and

270

Checking and refilling levels

diesel engines together, it means that the oil can be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicated in the Maintenance Programme, be per- formed by a technical service or specialised workshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the page 56.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- tance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of the Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service program. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is de- pendent on the time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*)

Special oils and processes have been devel- oped which, depending on the characteris- tics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the oil change service (Long- Life service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only be used ob- serving the following indications:

Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- tervals.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 272 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- vals page 56 (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the LongLife service interval or it has been disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which also appear in page 56. In this case, your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever comes first) Booklet Maintenance Pro- gramme.

In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 272 and you can- not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can add a small quantity of oil conform- ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die- sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whether your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate filter.

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- fore:

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 272 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the correspond- ing VW specifications and recommend keep- ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- gine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp

If this warning lamp is red it indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil page 272.

271

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical as- sistance.

Checking oil level

If the warning lamp is yellow the engine oil level should be checked as soon as possi- ble. Top up the oil at the next opportunity page 272.

Oil level sensor faulty*

If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

Check engine oil level

Fig. 237 Engine oil dipstick.

Read the additional information carefully page 55

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.

Wait for about two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out again and check the oil lev- el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- bly when filling the tank and before a jour- ney.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart- ment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 267.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Read the additional information carefully page 55

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 267.

The position of the filler neck is shown in the corresponding engine compartment image page 270.

Engine oil specification page 56.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised workshop.

272

Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above area A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and escape into the at- mosphere via the exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

Read the additional information carefully page 55

The engine oil must be changed at the inter- vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 267, safety notes for work in the engine compartment.

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.

When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- vent oil from running down your arm.

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any dam- age caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment

Because of disposal problems and the spe- cial tools and specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil and filter changed by a Technical Service.

Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.

Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Control lamp

There is a fault if:

The lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.

The lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is running, and three acoustic warn- ing signals are emitted .

This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

If the lamp lights up, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction of the radia- tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if necessary page 100.

If the control lamp lights up again after driv- ing on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact a Techni- cal Service or a specialised workshop.

Coolant level too low

If the lamp lights up, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and wait for it to cool down. First check the coolant level. If the lev- el of the coolant is below the MIN mark, top up with coolant liquid .

WARNING

If your vehicle is immobilised for technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf- fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and place the warning triangle.

273

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the en- gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un- til you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Before carrying out any work in the en- gine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corre- sponding warnings page 267.

Topping up coolant

Read the additional information carefully page 56

Top up coolant when the level is below the MIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Switch the ignition off.

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant

Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left .

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professio- nal assistance .

If there is still some coolant in the expan- sion tank, top up to the upper mark.

Top up with coolant until the level becomes stable.

Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle straight to a specialised workshop to have the cooling system examined. If there are no leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of coolant can only occur if the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.

WARNING

The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns!

The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze should be stored in the original container in a

safe place out of reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

If working inside the engine compartment, remember that, even when the ignition is switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in- jury.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool- ant system, the engine may fail leading to se- rious damage.

Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with respect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heat- ing would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION

Do not top up the expansion tank with cool- ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the cooling system. In this case, stop driving. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.

274

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION

The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system.

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur- ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G13 additive has been mixed with an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

Read the additional information carefully page 57

The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine compart- ment image page 270. The brake fluid res- ervoir has a black and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instrument panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low page 117.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 267.

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicates brake fluid change intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings in safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 267 in section Safety notes for work- ing in the engine compartment.

In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am- bient air. If the water content in the brake flu- id is too high, the brake system could cor- rode. This also considerably reduces the boil- ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the

brakes may then cause a vapour lock which could impair the braking effect.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501 14 standard.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv- ice. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may affect opera- tion of the brake system and reduce its effec- tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con- tainer does not state that it complies with VW 501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im- pairs the braking effect.

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warn- ings page 267.

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.

Perform the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the brake system for too

275

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

long. This would seriously affect the effec- tiveness of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the environment

The brake pads and brake fluid must be col- lected and disposed of according the applica- ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the necessary equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and dispos- ing of this waste material.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind- screen washer reservoir water

Read the additional information carefully page 57

The windscreen washer is supplied with liq- uid from the windscreen washer reservoir in the engine compartment. It has a capacity of approximately 3 litres.

The tank is in the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter- gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu- tion instructions on the packaging.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart- ment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 267.

CAUTION

Never put radiator anti-freeze or other addi- tives into the windscreen washer fluid.

Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.

Vehicle battery

Symbols and warnings on handling the battery

Read the additional information carefully page 57

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protec- tive gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro- hibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system:

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles con- taining lead.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents.

Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. Then

276

Checking and refilling levels

seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen- ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electri- cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in- jury.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- leased when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventila- ted room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical devices. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock- ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat- tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive ca- ble.

Switch off all electrical devices before re- connecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32F).

Ensure that the vent hose is always connec- ted to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat- tery immediately.

CAUTION

Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic components.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as the intense ul- traviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi- tions for a long period, protect the battery from freezing. If it freezes it will be dam- aged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the igni- tion is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer charging the bat- tery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked regu- larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- tries and in older batteries.

Open the bonnet and open the battery cov- er at the front in safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 267 in Symbols and warnings on handling the battery on page 276. For vehicles with the battery under the spare wheel, open the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The battery is located next to the spare wheel.

Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the battery.

If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.

277

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 270.

The magic eye indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.

There are two different colours:

Black: correct charge status.

Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop.

Charging or changing the battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires special- ist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the ve- hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat- tery should be checked by a specialised workshop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ommend you have the vehicle battery checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries us- ing special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled en- vironment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte- nance, performance and safety specifications of your vehicle.

WARNING

We recommend you use only maintenance- free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.

Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Symbols and warnings on handling the battery on page 276.

For the sake of the environment

Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis- posed of appropriately and must not be dis- posed of with ordinary household waste.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and at a right angle.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the same direction of ro- tation when they are installed again.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera- bly dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are not fitted on wheel rims.

New tyres

New tyres must be run in page 191.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- cording to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

278

Wheels

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. They should be checked immediately by a Techni- cal Service.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the direction of rota- tion indicated when fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

WARNING

New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly care- fully to avoid possible accidents.

Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.

If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve- hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Fig. 238 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

The maximum tyre pressure values are shown on a sticker stuck to the back of the left front door frame Fig. 238.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The values refer to Sum- mer tyres.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be re- duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially impor- tant at high speeds. The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (comfort tyre pressure). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con- sumption may increase slightly.

WARNING

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in- sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi- cle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

279

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

Tyre useful life

Fig. 239 Tyre tread wear indicators.

Fig. 240 Diagram for changing wheels.

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style and fitting.

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators Fig. 239, running across the tread. De-

pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark- ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let- ters TWI or other symbols) indicate the po- sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini- mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re- placed. Different figures may apply in export countries .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month page 279.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable to change them around as shown Fig. 240. The use- ful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encountered in nor- mal driving can cause them to become unbal- anced, which results in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel alignment checked by a Technical Service.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indicators are worn page 280. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of aquaplaning.

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in- sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked by a Technical Service.

Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately!

280

Wheels

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. Those approved by SEAT are specially matched to the charac- teristics of the vehicle and make a major con- tribution to good road-holding and safe han- dling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des- ignations makes it easier to choose the cor- rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa- tions marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/55 R16 91V This contains the following information:

Tyre width in mm

Height/width ratio in %

Tyre construction: Radial

Rim diameter in inches

Load rating code

Speed rating

195

55

R

16

91

V

The tyres could also have the following infor- mation:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT ... 1116 ... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by a Technical Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- posing of the old tyres.

Any technical service has full information on the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

WARNING

We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna- tive, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times.

Never use old tyres or those with an un- known history of use.

If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en- sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system to overheat.

All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer- ence) and the same tread pattern.

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note

A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ- ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the com- binations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehi- cles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your model may invalidate the vehi- cle's type approval for use on public roads.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short period of time and drive with

281

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it is the same model page 255.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Tyre monitoring indicator*

Fig. 241 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys- tem button.

The tyre monitoring system compares wheel revolutions alongside the wheel diameter of each wheel, with help from the ESC. If the di- ameter of a wheel changes, the tyre monitor- ing indicator lights up . The wheel diame- ter changes when:

Tyre pressure is insufficient.

The tyre structure is damaged.

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.

The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or on steep slopes).

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.

The temporary spare wheel is fitted.

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

After modifying tyre pressure or changing any wheels, the new tyre pressure must be stored in the Easy Connect system with the but- ton and the SETTINGS function button page 33.

You can also press and hold down the Fig. 241 button with the ignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex- ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value for a full load (see the sticker on the back of the left front door frame). If the tyre monitor system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

The tyre pressure control lamp lights up

If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver, then the tyre pressure control lamp will light up.

282

Wheels

WARNING

When the tyre pressure control lamp lights up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.

The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi- tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp may light up belatedly or may function incor- rectly.

Note

If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)*

Location and use of the temporary spare wheel

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheel

If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only intended for temporary use until you reach a workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel. This tem- porary spare wheel has been specially de- signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be changed with the temporary spare wheel from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or win- ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo- rary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punc- tured front wheel with this wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with the Beats Audio sound system (6 speakers with 1 subwoofer)*

Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel (carpet) as follows:

Pull the carpet upwards to remove it.

Disconnect the subwoofer's speaker cable.

Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise.

Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel.

When replacing the spare wheel, place the subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated by the arrow and with the word FRONT fac- ing forward.

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.

WARNING

After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Failure to do so may cause an accident. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame.

Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident!

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident!

Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of accident.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim.

283

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Advice

Winter service

Winter tyres

In winter conditions winter tyres will consid- erably improve the vehicle's handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres- sures specified for summer tyres (see the sticker on the back of the left front door frame).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's registration documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta- tion also apply to winter tyres.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page 281, New tyres and wheels determines the following speed limits for winter tyres:

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

Q

S

T

H

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These stickers are available from your technical service. The legal requirements of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa- rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel page 281, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to damage and risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment

Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi- ble. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.

284

Technical specifications

Technical data

Technical specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the informa- tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- ded in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fitted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbreviations used in the technical specifi- cations section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 242 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com- partment).

Fig. 243 Chassis number.

Chassis number

The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the vehicle data sticker and under the wind- screen, on the driver side Fig. 243. Addi- tionally, the chassis number is located in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side. The number is engraved on the top side rail, and is partially covered.

VIN in the Easy Connect

Select: button > SETTINGS function button > Service > Chassis number.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on the rear pillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.

285

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Technical data

Vehicle data sticker

The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: Fig. 242

Vehicle identification number (chassis number)

Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine type, finish, engine power and gearbox type

Engine code, gearbox code, external paint code and internal equipment code

Optional extras and PR numbers

Identifying letters

The identifying letters of the engine can be viewed on the instrument panel when the en- gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

Hold down the 0.0/SET 4 Fig. 124 but- ton for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel consump- tion

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised

1

2

3

4

by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: Eu- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend on the equipment/features of each individual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environmental conditions, load or number of passengers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption values can dif- fer from those calculated in the current Euro- pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittings or retro-fitting accessories will increase the weight of the vehicle .

WARNING

Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- cident. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and require- ments.

Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- missible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac- cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Trailer mode

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- proved are selected in intensive trials accord- ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different in other countries. All data in the official vehi- cle documentation takes precedence over these data at all times .

286

Technical specifications

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- ceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approaching the maxi- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is excee- ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure and wheel bolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the back of the left front door frame. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im- portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

287

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Technical data

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 70 kW (95 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

70 (95)/5,000-5,500 175/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights ARONA

Top speed (km/h) a)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) a)

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) a)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) a)

Permitted roof load (kg) a)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) a)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) a)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) a)

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

288

Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights ARONA manual

ARONA automatic

Top speed (km/h) 182 a)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,710 a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,187 a)

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 a)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 a)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 a)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 a)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 a)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 800 a)

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

289

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 244 Dimensions and angles.

290

Technical specifications

Fig. 244 CROSSOVER

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,503

F Backa) track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,552b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5

Turning radius (m) 11.0

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Dimension to the roof bars.

291

Te ch

ni ca

l d at

a A

dv ic

e O

pe ra

ti on

Em er

ge nc

ie s

S af

et y

Index

Index

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 function for preventing overtaking in an inside

lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro- gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Adjusting front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 146 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 147

Adjusting the head restraints front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Adjusting the seat adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Adjustment CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 82 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 84 functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Air recirculation

air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Anchoring

the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 179, 180

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 94 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 94

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 132

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-

tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Assistance Systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis-

tance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 237 parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 pedestrian monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Audible warning signal

seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 launch control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 steering wheel with gearshift paddles . . . . . . 185 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185

Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

293

Index

B Back seat

folding down and raising the back seat back- rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 221 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 267, 270 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 275

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 191 Brakes

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Braking

brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 BSD

see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

C Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Car care

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . . 128 central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 self-locking system to prevent involuntary un-

locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 62 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Changing a bulb

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 DRL (daytime running light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Changing settings CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 89

categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 88 securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29

Chrome parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

adhesive sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 262 radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

294

Index

steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 windows and exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 fan regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Control and warning lamps

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Controls and displays general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Controls on the steering wheel operating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 operating the telephone and audio system . . 121

Coolant checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Coolant level control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Coolant temperature control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Cooling system checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274 coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Correct sitting position

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

D Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Deactivation of front passenger front airbag . 21, 86 Detachable ball

assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 249 standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Diesel diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Diesel particulate filter malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 114 Display messages

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Disposal

seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Distance control

see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Door lock cylinder

de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Doors

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 72, 73, 74 Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

295

Index

Driver information system additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 bonnet, rear lid and doors open . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 engine oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 39

Driving driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 250, 252, 253

Driving abroad headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driving data data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

E E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 118

EDL see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Efficiency programme

additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 135

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 136 Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 179

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 181 Electronic differential lock (XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 169 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . 177, 179 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 189 bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Emergency operation front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Emission control system control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Engine and ignition automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 173 stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 267, 270 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Engine fault

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 270

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 273 check oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

296

Index

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Engine oil pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Environment ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Environmental tips refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 179 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 see also Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . 177

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Exhaust gas emission control system . . . . . . . . . 193 Exhaust gas purification system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 235 Extending

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Exterior lighting

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8 External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Faulty bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 84

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 207 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 see also Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . 203

Front Assist monitoring system City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 207 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front seat manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 265 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 193

Fuel tank cap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Fuel tank flap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 100 fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

G Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 190 Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 183 Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

297

Index

manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 185 General instrument panel

controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 139 warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

General overview of the engine compartment . . 270 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 141 HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 79 Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Headlights driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51, 53 heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 demisting the windscreen and side windows 162

Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 161

Heating and fresh air system controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Heating or cooling the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Hydraulic Brake Assist

automatic hazard warning lights activation . . 180

I Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 168 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 168

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 183 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 39

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 114 instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

K Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Key by remote control

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

298

Index

Keyless Access Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 129

Keyless Access locking and ignition system see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Keys replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 124 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Kick-down automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

L Launch control programme (automatic gearbox) 187 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 137

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 140 instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . 107 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 138 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Load compartment in the luggage compartment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 152 Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Locking and unlocking in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 16 Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 152

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 155 store the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 152

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . . 155

M Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 front assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

N Noises

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

O Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 On-screen messages

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 One-touch opening and closing

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

299

Index

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 16 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Operating malfunction Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

P Park Assist

automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . . 235 exiting a parking space (only for parallel

spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 186 with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 adjusting the display and audible warnings . 240 automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 braking while manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Parking Aid system see Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238

Parking assistance see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 224 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Parking distance warning system see Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ParkPilot

see Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 72, 73, 74 Passenger-side instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Pedestrian protection

see Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . 208 Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 262 Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Pre-heating system control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

R Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 212 Radio display: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

see Parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Rear bulbs in the side panel

disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17 Rear lights in the rear lid

disassemble the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Rear seat passengers

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 72, 73, 74 Rear shelf

store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

300

Index

Rear window wiper blade changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . . . 147 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 115 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Roll-back function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rubber seals

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Run-in

brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

S Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 21 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Safety instructions

coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 88 using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Saving fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Seat

heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 80 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 82 safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Selector lever (automatic gearbox) malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Special characteristics

tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Start-Stop system

driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 196 switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

301

Index

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 170 after the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . . . 170 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Steel wheel rims

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 168

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . 185

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

of front door panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 storage pocket in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 30, 168 System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

T Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Technical data

roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Temperature display

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tightening the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Tightening torque

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185 Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 96 Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Towing

blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Towing bracket

retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 96 Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 178, 179

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 252 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Trailer turn signals control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Transporting objects roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Trim parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Turn signals

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Tyre repair kit

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 280, 282 run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 65, 279

302

Index

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

U Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 80 Unlocking and locking

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Unlocking manually rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Upholstery: cleaning alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Vehicle

data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 129 vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 276 assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Vehicle care windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 69

Vehicle documentation compartment . . . . . . . . 150

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 134 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Vehicle paint code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Vehicle paintwork maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 256

Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Vehicle underbody

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

W Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 211 audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 195 for seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Warning messages red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 see also Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . 117

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

adhesive sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 287

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 282

Wheel cover removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 287 central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 62 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Windows electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 135 removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 96 Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 143 Windscreen washer water

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 filling amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Windscreen wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

303

Index

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 lifting the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Winter conditions battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Winter tyres sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

X XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

304

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.17

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer- tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ARONA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not in- cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modied depending on the technical requirements and on the mar- ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment tted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function- alities better. It does not replace the instruc- tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster- isk* is tted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow- ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- mation on safety. They warn you about possi- ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio- nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly nd the information you require.

OWNERS MANUAL

Arona

6F 90 12 72 0B A

In gl

s 6

F9 01

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Arona Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Arona as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Arona. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Arona 2017 v2 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.